K-12 TLC Header
Link to About K-12 TLCLink to The Bridge Builder poemLink to Persistence EssayLink to the K-12 TLC Policies
 

Grade 10 TAKS Mathematics

K-12 TLC Guide to Functions

General Resources Section

Link to Teacher Resources Section
Search

The K-12 TLC Guide to
Grade 10 TAKS
Mathematics

General Resources

    Texas Assessment of Knowledge and Skills
    Math Assessment: Grade 10, Objective 1

    Objective 1: The student will describe functional relationships in a variety of ways.

    For this objective you should be able to recognize that a function represents a dependence of one quantity on another and can be described in a number of ways.

    What Is a Function?

      A function is a set of ordered pairs ( x , y ) in which each x -coordinate is paired with only one y -coordinate. In a list of ordered pairs belonging to a function, no x -coordinate is repeated.

    When people eat at a restaurant, they often use a tip chart to determine the amount of the tip to leave the server. A tip chart
    is a good example of a function.
    Tip Chart

    On the tip chart above, each meal cost listed has exactly one recommended tip listed. Since the amount of the tip depends on
    how much the meal costs, the recommended tip is a function of the cost of the meal.

    Cost Recommended of Meal Tip
    $ 5.00 $ 1.00
    $ 6.00 $ 1.20
    $ 7.00 $ 1.40
    $ 8.00 $ 1.60
    $ 9.00 $ 1.80
    $ 10.00 $ 2.00

    Do you see that . . .
    In a functional relationship, for any given input there is a unique output.
    If you are given an x -value belonging to a function, you can nd the corresponding y -value.
    If you input $ 5.00 into the above function, the output will be $ 1.00.

    x
    y
    Function

    Input value
    Input an x -value and you get a y -value.
    Output value 13
    13 Page 14 15
    Objective 1
    13
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    There are two ways to test a set of ordered pairs to see whether it is a function.
    Examine the list of ordered pairs.
    If a set of ordered pairs is a function, no x -coordinate in the set is repeated. No x -coordinate should be listed with two different

    y -coordinates.

    Is this set of ordered pairs a function?
    { ( 1, 4) , ( 5, 7) , ( 1, 7) , ( 10, 12) }
    Examine the set of ordered pairs.
    None of the x -coordinates in the set are repeated.

    Two ordered pairs, ( 5, 7) and ( 1, 7) , have the same
    y -coordinate but different x -coordinates. This does not prevent this set of ordered pairs from being a functional relationship.

    This set of ordered pairs is a function.

    Examine a graph of the function.
    Use a vertical line to determine whether two points have the same x -coordinate. If two points in the function lie on the same vertical line,

    then they have the same x -coordinate, and the set of ordered pairs is not a function.

    Is this set of ordered pairs a function?
    { ( 2, 5) , ( 0, 7) , ( 1, 4) , ( 2, 6) }
    The number 2 is paired with 5; 0 is paired with 7; 1 is paired
    with 4; and 2 is paired with 6.

    Two ordered pairs, ( 2, 5) and ( 2, 6) , have the same
    x -coordinate. In a functional relationship, no x -coordinate should repeat.

    This set of ordered pairs is not a function.

    Do you see that . . . 14
    14 Page 15 16
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 1

    14
    In a function, the y -coordinate is described in terms of the x -coordinate. The value of the y -coordinate depends on the value of the x -coordinate.
    Do you see that . . .
    Suppose the number of miles you walk is equal to 4 times the number of hours you walk. Which is the dependent quantity in
    this function?
    If you walked for 1 hour, you would have walked 4 miles. If you walked for 3 hours, you would have walked 12 miles.

    The distance you walk depends on, or is described in terms of, the number of hours you walk.
    In this function, the number of hours you walk is the independent quantity. The distance you walk is the dependent quantity.
    An equation that describes this function is d 4 h , where d represents the number of miles you walk, and h represents the
    number of hours. In this equation, d , the distance you walk, depends on h , the number of hours you walk.

    The variable h is the independent variable.
    The variable d is the dependent variable.
    The number 4 is a constant , a quantity in an equation that does
    not change.

    Do the ordered pairs graphed below represent a function?
    The ordered pairs ( 2, 5) and ( 2, 7) lie on a common vertical line.
    They have the same x -coordinate, 2, but different y -coordinates, 5 and 7.

    This graph does not represent a function because two points lie on the same vertical line.

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8
    9

    3
    2
    1
    0
    1

    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 15
    15 Page 16 17
    Objective 1
    15
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Suppose the equation c 0.07 m 0.25 describes c , the cost of a phone call, in terms of m , the number of minutes the phone call lasts. In this function, c is the dependent variable, m is the independent variable, and 0.07 and 0.25 are constants.

    Jeremy works at an appliance store. He is paid $ 180.00 a week for his base salary plus a commission equal to 5% of his total sales.
    The equation s 180 0.05 d represents Jeremy s weekly salary, s , in terms of d , his total weekly sales in dollars.

    Which variable is the dependent variable in this equation? What are the constants?
    Jeremy s weekly salary, s , is the dependent quantity because it
    depends on d , his total sales.

    The constants are 180, Jeremy s base salary, and 0.05,
    his commission, because these numbers do not change.

    Try It Cara buys milk for her scout camp each morning. The function
    below shows the relationship between c , the total cost of the milk she buys, and n , the number of quarts she purchases.

    c 1.25 n
    In this functional relationship, which value is the dependent quantity?
    The _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ quantity is the number of quarts of milk Cara purchases.

    The _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ quantity is the total cost of the milk because the cost depends on the number of quarts of
    milk Cara buys.

    The independent quantity is the number of quarts of milk Cara purchases.
    The dependent quantity is the total cost of the milk because the cost
    depends on the number of quarts of milk Cara buys. 16
    16 Page 17 18
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 1

    16
    How Can You Represent a Function?
    Functional relationships can be represented in a variety of ways.

    Method Description Example
    List

    Table

    Mapping
    Description
    Equation
    y x 1

    f ( x ) x 1
    Graph y

    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345

    Graph the ordered pairs.

    Write a special type of
    equation that uses f ( x )
    to represent y .

    Function
    notation

    Write an equation
    that describes the
    y -coordinate in terms
    of the x -coordinate.

    The y -values for a set of points are 1 more
    than the corresponding x -values.
    Use words to describe
    the functional
    relationship.

    3
    1
    4
    10.5

    2
    2
    5
    11. 5

    Draw a picture that
    shows how the ordered
    pairs are formed.

    Place the ordered pairs
    in a table.

    { (   , ( 1, 2) , ( 4, 5) ,
    ( 10.5, 11.5) , }
    List the ordered pairs.

    xy
     
    12
    45
    10.5 11.5
    17
    17 Page 18 19
    Objective 1
    17
    To use function notation to describe a function, give the function a name, typically a letter such as f , g , or h . Then use an algebraic
    expression to describe the y -coordinate of an ordered pair.

    MAT H E

    MAT I CS Suppose f ( x ) 3 x 1.
    This function is read as f of x equals 3 times x minus 1.
    If you input x , the output will be 3 x 1.

    The y -coordinate of the ordered pair is 3 x 1.

    The function described by f ( x ) 3 x 1 is the same as the function described by y 3 x 1. In this function, an ordered

    pair looks like this: ( x , 3 x 1) .

    Here are three methods you can use to determine whether two different representations of a function are equivalent.

    Method
    Match a list or table of ordered
    pairs to a graph.

    Match an equation to a graph.

    Match a verbal description to
    a graph, an equation, or an
    expression written in function
    notation.

    Action
    Show that each ordered pair
    listed matches a point on the
    graph.

    Determine whether they
    are both linear or quadratic
    functions.

    Find points on the graph and
    show that their coordinates
    satisfy the equation.

    Find points that satisfy the
    equation and show that they
    are on the graph.

    Use the verbal description to
    nd ordered pairs belonging
    to the function and then show
    that they satisfy the graph,
    equation, or function rule.

    Find points on the graph or
    ordered pairs satisfying the
    equation or rule and show
    that they satisfy the verbal
    description.

    Do you see that . . . 18
    18 Page 19 20
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 1

    18
    Any equation of the form y mx b is a linear function . Its graph will be a line.
    Any equation of the form y ax 2 bx c is a quadratic function . Its graph will be a parabola.
    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9
    10
    11
    12

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    12

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

    xy
    0
    1
    3
    5
    6

    4
    1

    1
    5

    4

    f ( x ) = x 2 6 x + 4

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9
    10
    11
    12

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    12

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
    f ( x ) = 3 x 5
    xy

    0
    3
    5

    5
    2 11

    10
    4 19
    19 Page 20 21
    Objective 1
    19
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Which ordered pair, ( 7, 11) or ( 4, 1) , belongs to the function in which the y -coordinate is 3 more than the x -coordinate? Match the ordered pairs to the verbal description. For the ordered pair ( 7, 11) , the y -coordinate should be 3 more than 7.
    7 3 10, not 11
    The ordered pair ( 7, 11) does not belong to this function.
    For the ordered pair ( 4, 1) , the y -coordinate should be
    3 more than 4.

    4 3 1
    The ordered pair ( 4, 1) belongs to this function.

    A variety of methods of representing a function are shown below. Which of these examples represents a function that is different
    from the other functions?

    Look at the ordered pairs that make up each function.
    In Examples A, B, C, E, and F, each x -coordinate is paired with
    a y -coordinate that is its double, or two times as great.

    In Example D , for each ordered pair listed, the x -coordinate is
    paired with a y -coordinate that is two more rather than two times as great. So Example D includes ordered pairs that are

    not in the other examples.
    Only Example D represents a function that is different from the other functions shown.

    A. Verbal Description The value of y is double the
    value of x .
    B. List of Selected Values { ( 3, 6) , ( 2, 4) , ( 1, 2) ,

    ( 0, 0) , ( 5, 10) , }
    C. Table of Selected Values

    D. Mapping of Selected Values
    E. Graph
    F. Equation
    y 2 x
    xy
    1 2
    24
    00
    510

    5
    3
    1
    0

    7
    1
    3
    2 . . . . . .

    6
    6
    6

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 345 20
    20 Page 21 22
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 1

    20
    The table below presents selected values in a functional relationship.
    Write an equation that describes this functional relationship.
    Look for a pattern in the ordered pairs that belong to
    the function.
    The y -coordinate appears to be 5 more than the x -coordinate, so x 5 y should represent the pattern.

    Check this equation for each pair.
    x 5 y
    For x 2 2 5 3
    For x 11 5 6
    For x 55 5 10
    For x 77 5 12

    The y -coordinate in each ordered pair is 5 more than the x -coordinate.

    The rule for this function can be represented by the equation x 5 y or by the equation y x 5.

    x 2157
    y 361012

    The table on the right presents selected values in a functional relationship between x and y .
    Using function notation, write a rule that represents the relationship.
    Look for a pattern in the function s ordered
    pairs.
    The y -coordinate appears to be 5 times the x -coordinate plus 2.

    Check this pattern for each pair.
    5 x 2 y
    ( 1, 3) 5 1 2 3
    ( 1, 7) 5 1 2 7
    ( 3, 17) 5 3 2 17
    ( 8, 42) 5 8 2 42

    The y -coordinate is equal to 5 times the x -coordinate plus 2.
    The rule for this function can be represented by the equation y 5 x 2.

    Replace y with f ( x ) to express the rule in function notation: f ( x ) 5 x 2. Do you see
    that . . .

    For any equation A B , it is also true that
    B A . The function
    y 2 x 1 is the
    same as the function 2 x 1 y .

    xy
    1 3
    17
    317
    842 21
    21 Page 22 23
    Objective 1
    21
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Does the graph below represent the same function as the equation y 3 x 2 1?

    The function y 3 x 2 1 is a quadratic function because there
    is an x 2 term in its equation. Its graph should be a parabola. The above graph is a parabola, so the equation and the graph

    are the same type of function.
    Show that the equation and the graph represent the same
    quadratic function with the same set of ordered pairs.

    First check the coordinates of points on the graph to see
    whether they satisfy the equation. Pick points on the graph whose coordinates are easy to read. For example, you might

    choose ( 0, 1) , ( 1, 2) , and ( 2, 11) .
    Substitute these values into y 3 x 2 1 and determine whether the equation is true.

    Point ( 0, 1) Point ( 1, 2) Point ( 2, 11) x 0 and y 1 x 1 and y 2 x 2 and y 11
    y 3 x 2 1 y 3 x 2 1 y 3 x 2 1 1  3( 0) 2 12  3( 1) 2 111  3( 2) 2 1
    1  3( 0) 12  3( 1) 111  3( 4) 1 1  0 12  3 111  12 1
    1 12 211 11
    The points ( 0, 1) , ( 1, 2) , and ( 2, 11) are points on the graph, and their coordinates satisfy the equation.

    Next nd ordered pairs that satisfy the equation and con rm
    that the points are on the graph. Pick values that are easy to substitute, like x 1, x 0, or x 2, and nd the

    corresponding values for y .

    y
    x
    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10

    13
    14

    11
    12

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6
    ( 2, 11)
    ( 1, 2)
    ( 0, 1) 22
    22 Page 23 24
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 1

    22
    Try It The equation y x 2 1 represents a functional relationship.
    Which graph represents this function?

    Determine whether the equation is a linear or quadratic function.
    The equation is a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ function because it contains the term x 2 , which has an exponent of 2.

    Its graph must be a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345

    Substitute these values into y 3 x 2 1 and determine the value for y .
    x 1 x 0 x 2
    y 3 x 2 1 y 3 x 2 1 y 3 x 2 1 y 3( 1) 2 1 y 3( 0) 2 1 y 3( 2) 2 1

    y 3( 1) 1 y 3( 0) 1 y 3( 4) 1 y 3 1 y 0 1 y 12 1
    y 2 y 1 y 11
    The ordered pairs ( 1, 2) , ( 0, 1) , and ( 2, 11) satisfy the equation.

    Con rm that these ordered pairs are points on the graph. Yes, all three points are on the graph.
    The graph does represent the relationship y 3 x 2 1.

    A C
    B D
    23
    23 Page 24 25
    Objective 1
    23
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Answer choices _ _ _ _ _ _ _ and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cannot be the graph of this function because they are _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Determine which parabola is the correct graph. See whether the point ( 0, 1) in answer choice B satis es the
    equation y x 2 1.
    When x 0 and y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , is the equation y x 2 1 true?
    Does _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ?
    No, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Answer choice B is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    See whether the point ( 0, 1) in answer choice C satis es the
    equation y x 2 1.
    When x _ _ _ _ _ _ _ and y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , is the equation y x 2 1
    true?
    Does _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ?
    Yes, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Answer choice C is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    The equation is a quadratic function because it contains the term x 2 , which
    has an exponent of 2. Its graph must be a parabola. Answer choices A and
    D cannot be the graph of this function because they are lines. When x 0
    and y 1, is the equation y x 2 1 true? Does 1 0 2 1? No, 1 1.
    Answer choice B is not correct. When x 0 and y 1, is the equation y
    x
    2 1 true? Does 1 0 2 1? Yes, 1 1. Answer choice C is correct. 24
    24 Page 25 26
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 1

    24
    How Can You Draw Conclusions from a Functional Relationship?
    Use these guidelines when interpreting functional relationships in a real-life problem.

    Understand the problem.
    Identify the quantities involved and any relationships between them.
    Determine what the variables in the problem represent.
    For graphs: Determine what quantity each axis on the graph
    represents. Look at the scale that is used on each axis.

    For tables: Determine what quantity each column in the table
    represents.

    Look for trends in the data. Look for maximum and minimum
    values in graphs.

    Look for any unusual data. For example, does a graph start at
    a nonzero value? Is one of the problem s variables negative at any point?

    Match the data to the equations or formulas in the problem.

    The graph below shows the daily high temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit over a two-week period in August. During which
    three-day period did the temperature decrease by the greatest number of degrees?

    The temperature decreased from August 14 to August 16 and then again from August 17 to August 21. To determine which three-day
    period it decreased by the greatest number of degrees, you need to nd the coordinates of these points and calculate the total drop in
    the daily high temperature.
    You could build a table to organize your work.

    Temperature
    ( ° F)

    Daily High Temperatures

    Date in August
    791113 15 17 19 810121416182021

    60
    65
    70
    75
    80
    85
    90
    95
    100
    105

    0 25
    25 Page 26 27
    Objective 1 MAT
    H
    E

    MAT I CS

    The high temperature decreased by 18 ° F from August 19 to August 21. This was the greatest decrease in temperature for any three-day
    period on the graph.

    3-Day Day 1 High Day 2 High Day 3 High Decrease
    Period Temperature Temperature Temperature

    Aug. 14, 15, 16 105 ° F 103 ° F 100 ° F 5 ° F
    Aug. 17, 18, 19 102 ° F 100 ° F 98 ° F 4 ° F
    Aug. 18, 19, 20 100 ° F 98 ° F 85 ° F 15 ° F
    Aug. 19, 20, 21 98 ° F 85 ° F 80 ° F 18 ° F

    25
    The formula for converting degrees Celsius, C, to degrees
    Fahrenheit, F, is F 9 5 C 32.

    Does the graph represent this function accurately?
    The points increase at a rate of 9 ° F for every 5 ° C, and the slope

    of the graph should be 9 5 , the coef cient of C.
    Two points on the graph are ( 0, 32) and ( 100, 212) . When the

    coordinates are substituted into the equation F 9 5 C 32, the
    equation is true.

    F 9 5 C 32 F 9 5 C 32

    212 9 5 ( 100) 32 32 9 5 ( 0) 32
    212 180 32 32 0 32 212 212 32 32

    Yes, the graph accurately represents this function.

    90 100 110 0
    20
    40
    60
    80
    100
    120
    140
    160
    180
    200
    220

    10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
    Degrees Celsius

    Degrees
    Fahrenheit

    Now practice what you ve learned. 26
    26 Page 27 28
    Objective 1
    26
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 1
    Rhonda works at a grocery store after school. She is paid $ 5.50 per hour. Her weekly salary, s ,

    is described by the function s 5.5 h , where h is the number of hours she works in a week. What
    is the dependent quantity in this functional relationship?

    A The number of hours she works in a week
    B The number of dollars she is paid per hour
    C The total salary for a week
    D The number of days she works in a week

    Question 2
    The number of pretzels, p , that can be packaged in a box with a volume of V cubic units is given

    by the equation p 45 V 10. In this relationship, which is the dependent variable?

    A 10
    B 45
    C p
    D V

    Question 3
    Which of the following tables does not represent a function?

    Question 4
    The table shows the independent and dependent values in a functional relationship. Which

    function best represents this relationship?

    A f ( x ) 2 x 2 2 x 1
    B f ( x ) 2 x 2 2 x 1
    C f ( x ) x 2 1
    D f ( x ) 8 x 9

    Answer Key: page 224
    Answer Key: page 224

    Answer Key: page 224 Answer Key: page 224
    Independent Dependent
    01
    15
    213
    325

    AC
    BD

    xy
    12
    41
    12
    41

    xy
    1 1
    33
    22
    55

    xy
    11
    24
    39
    116

    xy
    20
    11
    35
    40 27
    27 Page 28 29
    Objective 1
    27
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 5 Jane started a weekend pet-care business. She bought the necessary supplies for $ 210. Jane charges $ 25 per weekend for each pet she cares for. Which function best represents her net pro t
    in terms of x , the number of pets she cares for?
    A f ( x ) x 25 210
    B f ( x ) 210 25 x
    C f ( x ) 210 x 25
    D f ( x ) 25 x 210

    Question 6
    Jeb s stereo is playing at a volume of 75 decibels. If the decibel level reaches 120 decibels, the

    neighbors will complain. Which inequality models q , the number of decibels Jeb can increase
    the volume before the neighbors complain?
    A 75 q 120
    B 75 q 120
    C 75 q 120
    D 75 q 120

    Question 7
    Which table best represents the function
    f ( x ) 2 5 x 3?

    Answer Key: page 224 Answer Key: page 224
    Answer Key: page 224
    AC

    BD

    xy
    0 3
    5 1
    10 1
    15 9

    xy
    10 7
    0 3
    10 1
    20 5

    xy
    1 5
    10 1
    30 9
    20 5

    xy
    10 7
    30 9
    60 21
    15 3 28
    28 Page 29 30
    Objective 1
    28
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 8
    Which graph best represents the function f ( x ) x 2 9?

    AC

    BD
    Answer Key: page 225

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8
    9

    3
    2
    1
    0
    1

    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8
    9

    3
    2
    1
    0
    1

    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8
    9

    3
    2
    1
    0
    1

    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8
    9

    3
    2
    1
    0
    1

    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 29
    29 Page 30 31
    Objective 1
    29
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 9 In chemistry lab Sonya places an empty beaker with a mass of 35 grams on a scale. She adds 5-gram measures of water to the beaker until the total mass of the beaker and water is 85 grams. Each time Sonya adds 5 grams of water, she records the mass. Which graph best illustrates the combined mass of the beaker and water as the amount of water in the beaker increases?

    AC

    BD
    Answer Key: page 225

    45 0
    10
    20
    30
    40
    50
    60
    70
    80

    510152025303540
    Water Added
    ( g)

    Total
    Mass
    of Beaker
    with Water

    0
    10
    20
    30
    40
    50
    60
    70
    80

    Water Added
    ( g)

    Total
    Mass
    of Beaker
    with Water

    9 1 2 3 4 5 678

    45 0
    10
    20
    30
    40
    50
    60
    70
    80

    510152025303540
    Water Added
    ( g)

    Total
    Mass
    of Beaker
    with Water

    9 0
    10
    20
    30
    40
    50
    60
    70
    80

    1 2 3 4 5 678
    Water Added
    ( g)

    Total
    Mass
    of Beaker
    with Water 30
    30 Page 31 32
    Objective 1
    30
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 10
    Jesse sells peanut butter cookies and chocolate chip cookies to raise money for his club. On average, he sells about twice as many chocolate chip cookies as he does peanut butter cookies. Which graph

    best models this relationship?

    AC

    BD
    Answer Key: page 225

    20 0
    4
    8
    12
    16
    20
    24
    28
    32

    481216
    Peanut Butter Cookies

    Chocolate
    Chip
    Cookies

    20 0
    4
    8
    12
    16
    20
    24
    28
    32

    481216
    Peanut Butter Cookies

    Chocolate
    Chip
    Cookies

    20 0
    4
    8
    12
    16
    20
    24
    28

    481216
    Peanut Butter Cookies

    Chocolate
    Chip
    Cookies

    20 0
    4
    8
    12
    16
    20
    24
    28

    481216 24
    Peanut Butter Cookies

    Chocolate
    Chip
    Cookies 31
    31 Page 32 33
    Objective 1
    31
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 11 Members of the junior class are raising money for their class trip by selling artwork by local artists. They bought the merchandise from the artists for a total price of $ 1025. The graph
    shows their cumulative total income for the two weeks of the sale. On what day of the sale did
    they rst make a pro t?

    A Day 5
    B Day 4
    C Day 0
    D Day 14

    Question 12
    Potassium nitrate dissolves in water to form a solution. The graph below shows the solubility of

    potassium nitrate in water as a function of the temperature of the water.

    According to this graph, about how many grams of potassium nitrate will dissolve in 100 cm 3 of
    water at 42 ° C?
    A 58 grams
    B 82 grams
    C 77 grams
    D 68 grams

    90 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
    Temperature of Water
    ( ° C)

    Solubility
    of
    Potassium

    Nitrate

    ( g/
    100

    cm
    3
    )

    0
    20
    40
    60
    80

    100
    120
    140
    130

    110
    90
    70
    50

    30
    10
    910111213 0
    2
    4
    6
    8
    10
    12
    14
    16
    18
    20
    22

    1 2 3 4 5 678
    Days

    Total Sales
    ( hundreds
    of dollars)

    Answer Key: page 225 Answer Key: page 226 32
    32 Page 33 34
    Objective 1
    32
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 13
    A home-builders group recently published a study comparing the cost of building homes from 1,000 to 3,000 square feet in area in four different communities. The study found that the formulas below

    predicted the approximate cost, c , of building a new home in each of these communities in terms of f , the area of the home in square feet.

    Based on these formulas, in which community would it cost the least to build a home with an area of 1,450 square feet?
    A T
    B S
    C R
    D V

    Community Cost of Building a New Home
    R c 15,000 80 f
    S c 25,000 75 f
    T c 60,000 50 f
    V c 40,000 65 f

    Answer Key: page 226 33
    33 Page 34 35
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    33

    The student will demonstrate an understanding of the properties and attributes
    of functions.

    Objective 2

    For this objective you should be able to
    use the properties and attributes of functions;

    use algebra to express generalizations and use symbols to
    represent situations; and

    manipulate symbols to solve problems and use algebraic skills to
    simplify algebraic expressions and solve equations and inequalities in problem situations.

    What Are Parent Functions?
    The simplest linear function, y x , is the linear parent function .

    If the graph of any function is a line, then its parent function
    is y x .

    A linear equation never has variables raised to a power other
    than 1.

    If an equation is linear, then its parent function is y x .

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
    y =
    x 34
    34 Page 35 36
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    34
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    What is the parent function of this graph?

    Since the graph of y x 5 is a line, its parent function is the linear parent function, y x .
    x
    4
    5

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 34
    y =
    x

    y =
    x 

    5

    Parent
    function

    5

    x
    4
    5

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
    y =
    x 

    5

    5

    y 35
    35 Page 36 37
    Objective 2
    35
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    The simplest quadratic function, y x 2 , is the quadratic parent function .
    If the graph of any function is a parabola, then its parent function
    is y x 2 .

    If an equation can be written in the form y ax 2 bx c , then
    it is quadratic.

    If an equation can be written in this form, then its parent
    function is y x 2 .

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
    y = x 2

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS What is the parent function of the equation y
    1
    2 x 1?
    Since the equation y 1 2 x 1 is a linear equation, its graph is a

    line. Its parent function is the linear parent function, y x .

    y

    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
    y =
    x

    y =
    x  1

    Parent
    function

    1 2 36
    36 Page 37 38
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    36
    What is the parent function of this graph?
    Since the graph of y x 2 3 is a parabola, its parent function is the quadratic parent function, y x 2 .
    y

    x
    6
    7
    8

    1
    2
    3

    5
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34

    y = x 2 + 3
    y = x 2
    Parent
    function

    y
    x
    6
    7
    8

    1
    2
    3

    5
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34

    y = x 2 + 3 37
    37 Page 38 39
    What Are the Domain and Range of a Function?
    A function is a set of ordered pairs of numbers ( x , y ) such that no x -values are repeated. The domain and range of a function are sets

    that describe those ordered pairs.

    The domain is the set of all the values of the independent
    variable, the x -coordinate.

    The range is the set of all the values of the dependent variable,
    the y -coordinate.

    De nition Example { ( 0,1) , ( 2, 6) , ( 3, 5) }
    Domain All the x -coordinates in the { 0, 2, 3} function s ordered pairs
    Range All the y -coordinates in the { 1, 5, 6} function s ordered pairs

    Objective 2

    37
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS What is the parent function of y x
    2 ?

    The equation y x 2 is a quadratic equation; therefore, its parent function is the quadratic parent function, y x 2 .
    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 1 2

    Parent
    function

    y = x 2
    y = x 2

    Identify the domain and range of the function below.
    { ( 3, 9) , ( 5, 39) , ( 9, 23) , ( 6, 14) }
    The domain is the set of x -coordinates in the ordered pairs: { ( 3, 9) , ( 5, 39) , ( 9, 23) , ( 6, 14) } . The domain is { 3, 5, 6, 9} .

    The range is the set of y -coordinates in the ordered pairs: { ( 3, 9) , ( 5, 39) , ( 9, 23) , ( 6, 14) } . The range is { 9, 14, 23, 39} .

    See Objective 1,
    page 12, for more
    information about
    functions. 38
    38 Page 39 40
    The domain and range of algebraic functions are usually assumed to be the set of all real numbers. In some cases, however, the domain or
    range of a function may be a subset of the real numbers because certain numbers would not make sense in a real-life problem situation.

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    38
    Try It What are the domain and range of the function below?
    { ( 4, 9) , ( 5, 16) , ( 6, 25) , ( 7, 36) }
    The domain of a function is the set of all _ _ _ _ _ -coordinates.
    The domain of this function is { _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ } .
    The range of a function is the set of all _ _ _ _ _ -coordinates.
    The range of this function is { _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ } .

    The domain of a function is the set of all x -coordinates. The domain of
    this function is { 5, 4, 6, 7} . The range of a function is the set of all
    y -coordinates. The range of this function is { 36, 9, 16, 25} .

    Consider the function l 4 h , in which l equals the number of legs on h horses. Are there any values that would not be reasonable to
    include in the domain or range of this function?
    The domain of this function is the set of values you may choose
    for h , the independent variable. Would it be reasonable to let h 1.2? No. The variable h represents a number of horses; it

    must be a nonnegative integer. The domain is the set of nonnegative integers, { 0, 1, 2, 3, } .

    It would not be reasonable to include any other numbers in the domain.
    The range of this function is the set of values you will obtain
    for the dependent variable, l , the number of legs for a group of h horses. Is it possible to get 6 as a value for l ? Could a group of

    horses normally have 6 legs? No, 6 is not a reasonable value for the range of this function. Since 1 horse has 4 legs, 2 horses
    have 8 legs, and so on, the range of this function is the set of multiples of 4, or { 0, 4, 8, 12, } .

    It would not be reasonable to include any other numbers in the range. 39
    39 Page 40 41
    Objective 2
    39
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    The graph of a function also can tell you about its domain and range.
    The domain of a function is the set of all the x -coordinates in the
    function s graph.

    The range of a function is the set of all the y -coordinates in the
    function s graph.

    91011
    19
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18

    9
    10

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78

    y
    x
    Domain

    Range
    4 < y < 18

    3 < x < 10

    The total volume in sales generated by a television commercial is a function of the number of people who watch the commercial.
    Wilson Electronics executives estimate that s , the dollars they will generate in sales for the number of people, n , who watch their
    commercial, is described by the function s 0.0035 n .
    What set of numbers would be an appropriate domain for this function: the integers, the real numbers, the rational numbers, or

    the whole numbers?
    The domain of this function is the number of people who watch the commercial. The number of people cannot be a fraction or a

    negative number. Of the choices given, the only set of numbers that does not contain any fractions or negative numbers is the
    whole numbers.
    The set of whole numbers would be an appropriate domain for this function. 40
    40 Page 41 42
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    40
    What inequalities best describe the domain and range of the function represented in this graph?
    The domain of this function is the set of x -values in the graph.
    The range of this function is the set of y -values in the graph.

    Domain
    Range
    9 10

    19
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18

    9
    10

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78

    y
    x
    0 < y < 16

    1 < x < 9

    9 10
    19
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18

    9
    10

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78

    y
    x
    An open circle on a graph means that the
    point is not included in the solution.

    The point ( 5, 3) is not included in the solution.
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    1 2 345

    y
    x
    41
    41 Page 42 43
    Objective 2
    41
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS In a chemistry experiment two chemicals are poured into a beaker to react. The temperature of the solution is taken every minute for 10 minutes beginning at 1: 05 P. M. The graph below shows the data from this experiment.

    What is a reasonable range for this function?
    The range of the function is the set of all the y -coordinates in the function. The y -coordinates represent the temperature of the mixed

    chemicals. The temperature during the 10-minute interval begins at 10 ° C, and it ends at 50 ° C.

    A reasonable range for this function is 10 y 50.

    10
    20

    0

    30
    40
    50
    60

    1: 06 1: 14 1: 08 1: 10 1: 12
    Time

    Chemistry Experiment
    Temperature ( ° C) P. M. P. M. P. M. P. M. P. M. 42
    42 Page 43 44
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    42
    Try It The number of pounds of potato salad, p , that will be needed for a
    company picnic is given by the function p 0.25 n 4, in which n equals the number of people who will attend the picnic. Each employee in the
    company can attend the picnic, and each can bring 3 guests. A total of 12 employees and guests have already signed up to attend the picnic. If
    the company employs a total of 40 people, what is a reasonable range for this function?

    The range of the function is the set of all the possible values for the
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ variable in the function, the amount of potato salad
    to be purchased.

    To determine the range of the function, rst determine the minimum and
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ number of people who will attend the picnic.

    The minimum number of people is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , since that many people have
    already signed up.
    The company has _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ employees. If every employee attends and
    brings 3 guests, then the maximum number of people is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    because 40 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Use the function p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ to nd
    the number of pounds of potato salad that will be needed.
    If 12 people attend, then p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4;
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds of potato salad will be needed.
    If 160 people attend, then p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4;
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds of potato salad will be needed.
    The number of pounds of potato salad that will be needed is between
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds.
    A reasonable range for this function is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    The range of the function is the set of all the possible values for the dependent
    variable in the function, the amount of potato salad to be purchased. To
    determine the range of the function, first determine the minimum and maximum
    number of people who will attend the picnic. The minimum number of people is
    12, since that many people have already signed up. The company has
    40 employees. If every employee attends and brings 3 guests, then the maximum
    number of people is 160 because 40 4 160. Use the function p 0.25 n 4 to
    nd the number of pounds of potato salad that will be needed. If 12 people attend,
    then p 0.25 12 4; 7 pounds of potato salad will be needed. If 160 people
    attend, then p 0.25 160 4; 44 pounds of potato salad will be needed. The
    number of pounds of potato salad that will be needed is between 7 pounds and
    44 pounds. A reasonable range for this function is 7 p 44. 43
    43 Page 44 45
    Objective 2
    43
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Can You Interpret a Problem from a Graph?
    To interpret a problem situation described in terms of a graph, follow these guidelines.

    Identify the quantities that are being compared.
    Understand what relationship the graph is describing.
    Look at the scales used on the axes of the graph.
    Identify the domain or range of the function graphed.
    Look for patterns in the data increases, decreases, or data that
    remain constant.

    Joe walked at a constant speed. The graph represents his distance from his starting point in terms of the time he walked.

    Give a reasonable description of the route Joe walked.
    The y -axis represents Joe s distance from his starting point. The x -axis represents his walking time. Did Joe get farther and farther

    away from his starting point as time went by? No, not for the entire time graphed.

    At rst Joe s distance from his starting point was 0. As time went by, this distance increased, but then it returned to 0. He ended his
    walk where he began it.
    A reasonable description of the route Joe walked is that he started at a certain point, walked for a while in one direction, and then

    turned around and returned to his starting point. The graph represents such a route.

    Time Joe Walked
    Joe s
    Distance
    from His
    Starting
    Point

    y

    x 44
    44 Page 45 46
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    44
    Try It Te rri placed a pot of water on the stove to boil. The temperature of
    the water in terms of the time it was on the stove is represented by the graph.

    What is a reasonable interpretation of the graph?
    At rst the water temperature _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Then the water temperature remained _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ for a while.

    Finally the water temperature _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ slowly.
    A reasonable interpretation of the graph is that the water
    temperature _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ until the water boiled. Then it
    remained at a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ temperature until Terri turned
    the stove off. Finally it _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ slowly to room
    temperature, where it remained constant.

    At rst the water temperature increased. Then the water temperature
    remained constant for a while. Finally the water temperature decreased
    slowly. A reasonable interpretation of the graph is that the water temperature
    increased until the water boiled. Then it remained at a constant temperature
    until Terri turned the stove off. Finally it cooled slowly to room temperature,
    where it remained constant.

    Time
    Temperature 45
    45 Page 46 47
    Objective 2
    45
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    What Is a Correlation in a Scatterplot?
    One way to represent a set of related data is to graph the data using a scatterplot. In a scatterplot each pair of corresponding values in the

    data set is represented by a point on a graph.

    To make predictions using a scatterplot, look for a correlation, or pattern , in the data. The pattern may not be true for every point, but look for the
    overall pattern the data seem to best t. 46
    46 Page 47 48
    As you move from left to right on as shown in they show this
    the graph, if the this scatterplot type of correlation: data points

    positive correlation

    negative correlation
    no correlation

    unde ned correlation
    51015 0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25

    51015 0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25

    51015 0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25

    51015 0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25

    51015 0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25 MAT

    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    46
    show a horizontal or vertical pattern
    show no pattern
    move down
    move up 47
    47 Page 48 49
    Objective 2
    47
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS In a survey of property values, p , the price of an acre of land, was compared to d , the distance of the land from the center of town. The data were graphed in a scatterplot. Describe the correlation between the cost of an acre of land and the land s distance from the center of town.

    Look for a pattern in the graph. The general tendency is for the price of an acre of land to decrease as the land s distance from the
    center of town increases. The price of an acre of land has a negative correlation to the land s distance from the center of town.

    Distance from
    Center of Town

    Price
    of Land
    per Acre

    Try It Raśl is a sport sherman. He weighs each sh he catches, and he
    measures its length. He graphed his data in a scatterplot.

    Describe the correlation between the lengths and weights of the sh Raśl caught.
    As the lengths of the sh _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , their weights generally _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    This is a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ correlation.
    As the lengths of the sh increase, their weights generally increase. This is a
    positive correlation.

    Fish
    Weight

    Fish Length 48
    48 Page 49 50
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    48
    How Do You Use Symbols to Represent Unknown Quantities?
    Represent unknown quantities with variables , or letters such as x or y . Use variables in expressions, equations, or inequalities.

    Jacob, Barbara, and Felix all have part-time jobs after school. Jacob earns $ 5 more per week than Felix, and Barbara earns twice as
    much per week as Jacob. The combined earnings of these three students are $ 115 per week. Write an equation that can be used to
    nd how much each student earns per week.
    Represent the number of dollars each student earns per week.

    x Felix s earnings
    x 5 Jacob s earnings ( $ 5 more than Felix s earnings)
    2( x 5) Barbara s earnings ( twice Jacob s earnings)
    Represent the sum of their earnings.

    Felix Jacob Barbara
    x ( x 5) 2( x 5)
    Write an equation setting this sum equal to $ 115.

    x ( x 5) 2( x 5) 115

    Quattro plans to paint his living room walls. The room is 3 feet longer than it is wide. The walls are 8 feet high. If a can of paint
    covers approximately 200 ft 2 , what expression can be used to represent the minimum number of cans of paint Quattro will need?

    Represent the area of each wall.

    Represent the sum of the areas of the four walls.
    2( smaller wall) 2( larger wall)
    2( 8 x ) 2 [ 8( x 3) ]
    16 x 16( x 3)
    16 x 16 x 48
    32 x 48
    The total area of the four walls is represented by the expression 32 x 48. Since the paint in each can covers 200 ft 2 , divide the area

    by 200 to represent the number of cans of paint needed: 32 x 200 48 .

    S m a l l e r W a l l s L a r g e r W a l l s
    x width of the room x 3 length of the room
    8 height of the room 8 height of the room
    8 x area 8( x 3) area 49
    49 Page 50 51
    Objective 2
    49
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Do You Represent Patterns in Data Algebraically?
    To r epresent patterns in data algebraically, follow these guidelines.
    Identify what quantities the data represent.

    Identify the relationships between those quantities.
    Look for patterns in the data.
    Use symbols to translate the patterns into an algebraic
    expression or equation.

    Ronald and Jaime make weekly deposits into their savings accounts. The table below shows the opening balances and the
    balances for each account after the rst four weekly deposits.
    Account Balances

    If the pattern continues, what expression can be used to represent the balance in Jaime s account after n weeks?
    Jaime s opening balance is $ 180. His balance increases by $ 18 each week. His balance in n weeks can be represented by the expression
    18 n 180. See whether this expression works for all the known values.

    If the pattern continues, the balance in Jaime s account after n weeks can be represented by the expression 18 n 180.

    Name Opening Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Balance
    Ronald $ 100 $ 124 $ 148 $ 172 $ 196
    Jaime $ 180 $ 198 $ 216 $ 234 $ 252

    Week 18 n 180 Balance Yes / No ( dollars)
    118 1 180 198 198 Yes
    218 2 180 216 216 Yes
    318 3 180 234 234 Yes
    418 4 180 252 252 Yes 50
    50 Page 51 52
    The table below represents a functional relationship between x , the lengths of the bases of a series of triangles, and y , their heights. If
    the pattern continues, what expression can be used to express their heights in terms of their bases?

    The differences between the y -values are not constant. For example, 5 2 3, but 10 5 5. This is not a linear relationship.
    To determine whether the relationship is quadratic, compare the y -values to the square of the x -values.

    The y -values appear to be 1 more than the squares of the x -values.
    See whether all the coordinates satisfy the rule y x 2 1. Substitute the values of x and y from the table into the equation.

    All the ordered pairs satisfy the equation y x 2 1.
    Since every pair in the table satis es the equation, then y x 2 1 expresses the triangles heights in terms of their bases. .

    xy
    12
    25
    310
    417

    Change in x -values Change in y -values + 1 + 1
    + 1

    + 3
    + 5
    + 7

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    50
    xx 2 y
    112
    245
    3910
    41617

    x y x 2 1 y Yes / No
    2  ( 1) 2 1 12  1 12Yes
    2 2
    5  ( 2) 2 1 25  4 15Yes

    5 5
    10  ( 3) 2 1 310  9 110 Yes

    10 10
    17  ( 4) 2 1 4 17  16 117 Yes

    17 17 51
    51 Page 52 53
    Objective 2
    51
    How Do You Simplify Algebraic Expressions?
    You can use the commutative, associative, and distributive properties to simplify algebraic expressions. Use these properties to remove

    parentheses and combine like terms.

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Use the commutative property to change the order of the terms
    in addition and multiplication.

    Use the associative property to change the groupings in addition
    or multiplication.

    Use the distributive property to remove the parentheses by
    multiplying the term outside the parentheses by each term inside the parentheses.

    Like terms are terms in an algebraic expression
    that use the same variable raised to the
    same power.
    For example, in the expression 6 t 3 2 t 3 ,

    6 t 3 and 2 t 3 are like terms because they are
    both expressed in terms of the same variable, t ,
    raised to the same power, 3.

    Like terms in an algebraic expression
    can be combined.
    6 t 3 2 t 3 4 t 3

    Property
    Name ( If a , b , and c are any Examples three real numbers,
    then )

    a b b a 4 2 x 2 x 4 Commutative
    Property or or
    ab ba 5 y 2 x 5 xy 2

    a ( b c ) ( a b ) c ( 5 y ) 2 y 5 ( y 2 y )
    Associative 5 3 y Property or or

    a ( bc ) ( ab ) c 5( 3 m ) ( 5 3) m 15 m
    Distributive 7( 2 x 3) 7( 2 x ) 7( 3) Property
    14 x 21 a ( b c) ab ac 52
    52 Page 53 54
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    52
    If the length of a rectangle is represented by l and its width is 3 units less than its length, does the expression l 2 3 l represent
    its area?
    Let l represent the length of the rectangle.

    Let l 3 represent the width ( 3 units less than the length) .
    Then l ( l 3) represents the area of the rectangle, A lw .

    Simplify the expression l ( l 3) .

    l ( l 3) l l l 3
    l 2 3 l
    Yes, the expression l 2 3 l represents the area of the rectangle.

    Simplify the expression 5 y 3 3 2 y 3 1.
    5 y 3 3 2 y 3 1 ( 5 y 3 2 y 3 ) ( 3 1)
    3 y 3 4
    When simpli ed, the expression 5 y 3 3 2 y 3 1 3 y 3 4. 53
    53 Page 54 55
    When simplifying expressions, it is
    helpful to remember that the expressions m
    and 1 m are equivalent.

    Objective 2

    53
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS The lengths of the three sides of a triangle are represented by the expressions 2 m 5, m 1, and 7 m 3. Write an expression in terms of m that can be used to represent the perimeter of the triangle. The perimeter of a triangle is the sum of the lengths of its
    three sides. The perimeter of the triangle can be represented by the expression 2 m 5 m 1 7 m 3.
    Simplify this expression.
    2 m 5 m 1 7 m 3 ( 2 m 1 m 7 m ) ( 5 1 3)
    10 m 7
    The perimeter of the triangle can be represented by the expression 10 m 7.

    Simplify the expression ( 4 b 2 6) ( 2 b 2 3) .
    When parentheses are preceded by a negative sign, it means the quantity in parentheses is multiplied by 1.

    ( 4 b 2 6) ( 2 b 2 3) ( 4 b 2 6) 1( 2 b 2 3)
    4 b 2 6 2 b 2 3
    ( 4 b 2 2 b 2 ) ( 6 3)
    2 b 2 3
    When simpli ed, the expression ( 4 b 2 6) ( 2 b 2 3) 2 b 2 3.

    Do you see that . . . 54
    54 Page 55 56
    See Objective 5,
    page 122, for more
    information about
    the FOIL method.

    Mr. and Mrs. Seymour have a dog pen in their backyard, as shown by the shaded gure in the diagram below.
    Write an expression that can be used to represent the area of the yard that does not include the dog pen.
    The area of the entire yard, a rectangle, is equal to its width times
    its length.

    The area of the rectangle is x ( 2 x 6) . Simplify.

    x ( 2 x 6) 2 x 2 6 x
    The area of the dog pen is equal to its length times its width. The
    area of the smaller rectangle is ( x 12) ( x 16) . Simplify by using the FOIL method.

    ( x 12) ( x 16) ( x x ) ( x 16) ( 12 x ) ( 12 16)
    x 2 ( 16 x 12 x ) 192
    x 2 28 x 192
    Subtract to nd the area of the yard not including the dog pen.

    Area of yard Area of pen
    ( 2 x 2 6 x ) ( x 2 28 x 192)
    Simplify by multiplying the quantities in the second parentheses
    by 1.

    ( 2 x 2 6 x ) 1( x 2 28 x 192) 2 x 2 6 x x 2 28 x 192
    ( 2 x 2 x 2 ) ( 6 x 28 x ) 192
    x 2 34 x 192
    The expression x 2 34 x 192 represents the area of the yard that does not include the dog pen.

    2 x + 6
    x 16
    x 12 x

    Backyard
    MAT

    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    54 55
    55 Page 56 57
    Objective 2
    55
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Solve the equation 3( y 2) 9.
    3( y 2) 9
    3 y 3( 2) 9
    3 y 6 9
    6 6
    3 y 15

    3
    3y
    3
    15

    y 5
    In this equation, y 5.

    Solve the equation 2 x 5 x 4.
    2 x 5 x 4
    1 x 1 x
    x
    5 4
    5 5
    x 9
    In this equation, x 9.

    How Do You Solve Algebraic Equations?
    To solve algebraic equations, follow these guidelines.
    Simplify any expressions in the equation.

    Add or subtract on both sides of the equation to get variable
    terms on one side and constant terms on the other.

    Simplify again if necessary.

    Multiply or divide to obtain an equation that has the variable
    isolated with a coef cient of 1. In the term 6 x , 6 is called the coef cient
    of x . 56
    56 Page 57 58
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    56
    In the gure below, the perimeter of the rectangle is 20 units greater than the perimeter of each triangle. Find the length of the
    diagonal of the rectangle.

    Represent the perimeter of the rectangle.
    P 2 l 2 w
    2( 3 x 5) 2( 2 x )
    Simplify this expression.

    2( 3 x 5) 2( 2 x ) 2( 3 x ) 2( 5) ( 2 2) x
    6 x 10 4 x
    ( 6 x 4 x ) 10
    10 x 10
    Represent the perimeter of a triangle.

    P s 1 s 2 s 3
    ( 3 x 5) ( 2 x ) ( 4 x 10)
    Simplify this expression.

    ( 3 x 5) ( 2 x ) ( 4 x 10) 3 x 5 2 x 4 x 10
    ( 3 x 2 x 4 x ) ( 5 10)
    9 x 15
    Write an equation.

    Perimeter of rectangle Perimeter of triangle 20
    10 x 10 9 x 15 20
    10 x 10 9 x 5
    9 x 9 x
    x
    10 5
    10 10
    x 15

    3 x 5
    4 x
    10 2 x 57
    57 Page 58 59
    Objective 2
    57
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Use this value for x to nd the length of the diagonal of the rectangle. The diagonal is represented by the expression 4 x 10. Replace x with 15. 4 x 10 4( 15) 10 60 10
    50
    The diagonal of the rectangle is 50 units long. 58
    58 Page 59 60
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 2

    58
    Try It A manufacturer builds cubical containers. The equation that models
    c , the cost of building a container, is c 3.6 s 3.20, in which s represents the length of each side of the cubical container in feet.

    Find the length of each side of a cubical container that costs $ 35.60 to manufacture.
    Substitute _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ for c in the equation that models the cost of building a container.
    Solve the equation for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , the length of a side.
    35.60 3.6 s 3.20

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3.6 s
    32.40 3.6 s

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ s
    Each side of the cubical container is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ feet long.

    Substitute 35.60 for c in the equation that models the cost of building a
    container. Solve the equation for s , the length of a side.

    35.60 3.6 s 3.20
    3.20 3.20
    32.40 3.6 s
    32.
    3. 6
    40 3.
    3. 6
    6s

    9 s
    Each side of the cubical container is 9 feet long.

    Now practice what you ve learned. 59
    59 Page 60 61
    Objective 2
    59
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 14 Which function is the parent function of the graph below?

    A y 2 x
    B y x 2
    C x y 2
    D y x

    Question 15
    Marcy deposits $ 550 in a savings account at 3% simple annual interest. The value of this account,

    v , is given by the function v 550 16.5 t , in
    which t is the number of years the money is in the bank. What is the range of this function?

    A 0 v 550
    B v 550
    C v 550
    D 0 v 16.5

    Question 16
    Which of the following situations is best represented by the graph below?

    A The speed of a roller coaster as it goes from a high point on its track to a low
    point on the track and then back up to another high point

    B The price of a stock that drops to half of its original value and then goes back to
    its original value
    C The speed of a bullet that is red straight up and then falls back to the ground

    D The speed of a race car that starts from the starting line, races several laps, and
    then makes a refueling stop

    y
    x
    y
    x
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 1 2

    Answer Key: page 226

    Answer Key: page 226 Answer Key: page 226 60
    60 Page 61 62
    Objective 2
    60
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 17
    John and some of his friends went waterskiing in his new boat. He made a table that showed the

    number of gallons of gas remaining at the end of each hour. The scatterplot below shows the gas
    that remained in terms of the hours that had passed.

    Which of the following describes the correlation between the gas that remained and the hours
    that had passed?
    A Positive correlation
    B No correlation
    C Negative correlation
    D Unde ned correlation

    Question 18
    Alex and Millie are selling kites from their stand on the beach. Each day more people stop to look

    at and buy the kites. Alex and Millie kept the following record comparing the number of
    customers that stopped to look at their kites and the money they collected in sales each day.

    Kite Sales

    If this trend continues, how many customers will need to stop and look at Alex and Millie s kites
    in order for their sales in one day to reach $ 330?
    A 42
    B 60
    C 66
    D 48

    y
    x
    Gas
    ( gallons)

    Time ( hours)

    Number of customers 12 18 24 30
    Amount of sales ( dollars) 180 210 240 270

    Answer Key: page 227 Answer Key: page 226 61
    61 Page 62 63
    Question 19
    Frieda wants to buy a refrigerator that is 6 feet tall. The refrigerator s width is 1.75 times its

    depth. Which equation best describes V , the volume of the refrigerator in terms of its depth, x ?

    A V 6 x 10.5
    B V x 2 1.75 x
    C V 1.75 x 2 6 x
    D V 10.5 x 2

    Question 20
    The following ordered pairs belong to the function f ( x ) .

    ( 1, 2) , ( 2, 8) , ( 3, 18) , ( 4, 32)
    Which equation best describes this function?

    A f ( x ) x 4
    B f ( x ) 8 x
    C f ( x ) 2 x 2
    D f ( x ) x 6 x

    Question 21
    Which algebraic expression best represents the relationship between the terms in the following

    sequence and n , their position in the sequence?
    1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . .

    A n 2
    B 2 n 1
    C 2 n 1
    D n 1

    Objective 2

    61
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 227

    Answer Key: page 227 Answer Key: page 227 62
    62 Page 63 64
    Question 22
    Mr. Jones runs a bakery. His monthly pro t in dollars, P ( x ) , is given by the function P ( x ) 1 2 x 2, in
    which x represents the number of loaves of bread sold in a month. What is the minimum number of
    loaves he must sell next month if he is to have a pro t of at least $ 3000?

    Record your answer and ll in the bubbles. Be sure to use the correct place value.

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    Objective 2

    62
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Answer Key: page 227
    Answer Key: page 228
    Question 23
    Which of these is equivalent to the expression below?
    2 x 2( 3 x 4) 3( 8 x 4)

    A 8 x 4 5
    B 32 x 8
    C 32 x 20
    D 4( 8 x 5) 63
    63 Page 64 65
    The student will demonstrate an understanding of linear functions.
    Objective 3

    For this objective you should be able to
    represent linear functions in different ways and translate among
    their various representations; and

    interpret the meaning of slope and intercepts of a linear function
    and describe the effects of changes in slope and y -intercept in real-world and mathematical situations.

    What Is a Linear Function?
    A linear function is any function whose graph is a line.

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    63
    Is the function represented by the following table of values a linear function?
    Graph the ordered pairs in the table on a coordinate grid.

    The points lie on a line. Therefore, the function they represent is a linear function.
    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9
    10
    11
    12

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    12

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

    xy
    2 5
    11
    35
    611 64
    64 Page 65 66
    5
    3

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    64
    Try It The table below describes a linear relationship.
    Does the equation 3 y 2 x 3 represent the same linear function?
    To con rm that the equation 3 y 2 x 3 represents the same linear function as the table, substitute the ordered pairs from the

    table into the equation.

    The table and the equation represent the same function.
    xy Yes/ No Does 3 y 2 x 3?
    3( 1)  2( 0) 3
    01 3  0 3 Yes
    3 3

    3 ( 5 3 )  2( 1) 3 1
    5  2 3 Yes
    5 5

    3( 3)  2( 3) 3
    33 9  6 3 Yes
    9 9

    xy Yes/ No Does 3 y 2 x 3?
    3( _ _ _ _ _ _ )  2( _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 3
    01 _ _ _ _ _ _  _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    3( _ _ _ _ _ _ )  2( _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 3
    1 5 3 _ _ _ _ _ _  _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    3( _ _ _ _ _ _ )  2( _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 3
    33 _ _ _ _ _ _  _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    xy
    01

    1 5 3
    33 65
    65 Page 66 67
    What Is Slope?
    The slope of a graph is its rate of change, how fast it increases or decreases. The slope of a line can also be described as its steepness,

    how fast the line rises or falls.

    The rate of change of a line is the ratio that compares the change in y -values to the corresponding change in x -values for any two points on
    the graph.
    A graph s slope is often described as its rise ( change in y ) over run ( change in x ) . To nd the slope of a line from its graph:

    Pick any two points on the graph.
    Find the change in y -values, y 2 y 1, or the rise.
    Count the number of units up or down between the two points.

    Find the change in x -values, x 2 x 1, or the run.
    Count the number of units left to right between them.

    Determine whether the slope is positive or negative.
    As you go from left to right: if the line points up, the slope is positive.

    if the line points down, the slope is negative.
    Write the slope as a ratio:
    run

    rise or ch
    ch
    ange
    ange
    in
    in
    y
    x
    .

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    x = 2

    Undefined slope
    The line is vertical.

    y

    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    y = 2

    Zero slope
    The line is horizontal.

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    y =
    x

    Negative slope
    The line falls from left to right.

    y

    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    y =
    x

    Positive slope
    The line rises from left to right.

    Do you see that . . .

    Objective 3

    65
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS 66
    66 Page 67 68
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    66
    What is the slope of the line in the graph below?
    Find the slope by counting the change in y -values and the corresponding change in x -values between any two points.
    The y -value changes 2 units for every 5 units the x -value changes. As you go from left to right, the line points down, so the slope is
    negative.

    The slope of the graph is run rise 2 5 .

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    5 units
    2 units

    What is the slope of the line passing through the points ( 1, 1) and ( 3, 5) ?
    Let ( x 1, y 1) be ( 1, 1) and ( x 2, y 2) be ( 3, 5) .
    m x y2 2 x 1 y1 5 3 1 1 4 2 2
    The slope of the line is 2.

    Slope Formula
    For any two points ( x 1, y 1) and ( x 2, y 2) on a graph, the slope, m , of the line that passes through them is:

    m run rise x y2 2 x 1 y1 change in y -values change in x -values

    Another way to nd the slope is to use the slope formula. 67
    67 Page 68 69
    Objective 3
    67
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS The set of ordered pairs below represents a linear function. What is the rate of change of the function? { ( 0, 1) , ( 1, 3) , ( 2, 5) , ( 3, 7) , ( 4, 9) } Since this is a linear function, you can choose any two ordered pairs belonging to the function to nd its rate of change.
    Use the ordered pairs ( 0, 1) and ( 2, 5) .
    m x y2 2 x 1 y1 5 2 1 0 4 2 2
    The rate of change of the function is 2.
    Use the ordered pairs ( 1, 3) and ( 4, 9) .

    m x y2 2 x 1 y1 9 4 3 1 6 3 2
    The rate of change of the function is still 2.
    The rate of change, or slope, of a linear function does not depend on the points you pick to calculate the slope. Do you see

    that . . .

    Try It Suppose you graphed the number of miles you drove on a trip.

    Based on this graph, at what speed did you drive?
    The slope of the graph represents your _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , the
    number of miles per hour you drove.
    To nd the slope, compare the change in _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ and
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ between any two points on the graph.
    You could use the following two points: ( 1, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) and
    ( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , 240) .

    60
    120

    0

    180
    13 2 4
    Time
    ( h)

    Distance
    ( mi)

    y

    x 68
    68 Page 69 70
    The y -intercept of a graph is the y -coordinate
    of the point where the graph crosses the y -axis.
    The x -coordinate of any point on the y -axis is 0.
    Thus, the coordinates of the y -intercept are
    ( 0, y ) .

    m 240 XX 1 XXX
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Your speed was _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ miles per hour.

    The slope of the graph represents your speed, the number of miles per hour
    you drove. To nd the slope, compare the change in y -values and x -values
    between any two points on the graph. You could use the following two
    points: ( 1, 60) and ( 4, 240) .

    m 4 240 1 60

    3
    180

    60
    Your speed was 60 miles per hour.

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    68
    What Is the Slope-Intercept Form of a Linear Function?
    One form of the equation of a linear function is y mx b . This form is called the slope-intercept form of a linear function.

    When the equation of a linear function is written in the form y mx b :
    m is the slope of the graph of the function; m is the value by
    which the x -term is being multiplied.

    b is the y -intercept of the graph of the function; b is the value
    that is being added to the x -term.

    What are the slope and the y -intercept of the function y 4 x 1?
    The equation is in slope-intercept form, y mx b . Read the values of m and b from the equation.

    The value by which the x -term is being multiplied is 4, so m 4.
    The value that is being added to the x -term is 1, so b 1.

    The slope of the function, m , is 4.
    The y -intercept of the function, b , is 1. 69
    69 Page 70 71
    Objective 3
    69
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS What are the slope and y -intercept of the function 6 x y 10? To determine the slope and y -intercept, transform the equation 6 x y 10 into slope-intercept form, y mx b . 6 x y 10
    6 x 6 x
    y
    6 x 10
    The equation is now in the form y mx b .
    Read the values of m and b from the revised equation. For this
    function, m 6, and b 10.

    The slope of the function, m , is 6.
    The y -intercept of the function, b , is 10.

    Try It Find the slope and y -intercept of the graph of the linear function
    3 y 6 x 9.
    To determine the slope and y -intercept of the graph, transform the equation 3 y 6 x 9 into slope-intercept form, y mx b .

    3 y 6 x 9
    3 y 6 x 9

    y _ _ _ _ _ _ x _ _ _ _ _ _
    Read the values of _ _ _ _ _ _ and _ _ _ _ _ _ from the revised equation.
    For this function, m _ _ _ _ _ _ and b _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    The slope of the function is _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    The y -intercept of the function is _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    3 y 6 x 9
    3
    3y
    3
    6x 9
    3

    y 2 x 3

    Read the values of m and b from the revised equation. For this function,
    m 2 and b 3. The slope of the function is 2. The y -intercept of the
    function is 3. 70
    70 Page 71 72
    The absolute value of a number indicates its
    distance from 0 on a number line. The symbol
    for the absolute value of x is | x | .

    For example, | 3| 3
    | 5| 5
    | 8.2| 8.2

    Function 1 Function 2 Effect
    y 1 2 xy 3 x
    Since | 3| | 1 2 | , function 2 is
    steeper than function 1.

    y 3 x 1 y 2 x 1
    Since | 2| | 3| , function 2 is less steep than function 1.

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
    y = 3 x + 1
    y
    =

    2

    x
    +
    1

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34
    y = x
    12

    y
    =

    3
    x

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    70
    What Are the Effects on the Graph of a Linear Function If the Values of m and b Are Changed in the Equation y  mx  b ?
    In the equation y mx b , m represents the slope of the graph, and b represents the y -intercept of the graph. Changing either of these two
    constants, m or b , will affect the graph of the function.
    Change in Slope, m 71
    71 Page 72 73
    Objective 3
    71
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS If the function y x 6 were changed to y 3 x 6, what would be the effect on the graph of the function? The equations are both in slope-intercept form, y mx b . In this form, m represents the graph s slope. The slope of the original function is 1.
    If the equation were changed to y 3 x 6, the new value for
    m would be 3.

    The graph of the new function would be steeper because | 3| | 1| .
    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y
    =

    3
    x


    6

    y =
    x
    6

    Do you see that . . . 72
    72 Page 73 74
    Function 1 Function 2 Effect
    y 2 3 x 4 y 2 3 x 6
    Function 2 crosses the y -axis at a higher point.

    y x 3 y x 1
    Function 2 crosses the y -axis at a lower point.

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y =
    x
    + 3 y

    =
    x

    1

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y =
    x + 4 23

    y =
    x + 6 23

    MAT

    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    72
    Change in y -intercept, b
    If the y -intercept of the function y 1 2 x 4 were decreased by 3, what would be the equation of the new function?
    The equation is in slope-intercept form, y mx b . In this form, b represents the graph s y -intercept.
    The y -intercept of the given function is 4.
    If the y -intercept of the function were decreased by 3, it would be
    4 3 4 ( 3) 7. The new value for b would be 7.

    The equation of the new function would be y 1 2 x 7. 73
    73 Page 74 75
    Objective 3
    73
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS The function y
    1
    4 x 1 was changed to y
    1
    4 x 5. What is the effect on the graph of the function?

    The value for b in the rst function is 1.
    Its graph crosses the y -axis at ( 0, 1) .

    The value for b in the second function is 5.
    Its graph crosses the y -axis at ( 0, 5) .

    Since 5 1 4, the graph of y 1 4 x 5 is 4 units above the
    graph of y 1 4 x 1.
    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y = x + 1 14

    y = x + 5 14

    Try It If the y -intercept of the function y 2.5 x 1.75 were increased
    by 2.25, what would be the effect on the graph of the function?
    The equation of the given function is in slope-intercept form.
    In this form, _ _ _ _ _ _ represents the slope of the line, and its
    y -intercept is _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    If the y -intercept were increased by 2.25, the new y -intercept would
    be equal to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    The new line would cross the y -axis at a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ point than the original line.

    The new line would have the same slope, _ _ _ _ _ _ , as the original line.
    The equation of the given function is in slope-intercept form. In this form,
    2.5 represents the slope of the line, and its y -intercept is 1.75. If the
    y -intercept were increased by 2.25, the new y -intercept would be equal to
    1.75 2.25 0.5. The new line would cross the y -axis at a higher point
    than the original line. The new line would have the same slope, 2.5, as the
    original line. 74
    74 Page 75 76
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    74
    Slopes of lines can tell you whether the lines are parallel or perpendicular.
    If two lines are parallel, then they have the same slope, and their
    equations have the same value for m .

    Look at the graphs of these two equations: y 3 x 5 and y 3 x 2.

    If two lines are perpendicular, then they have negative reciprocal
    slopes, and their equations have negative reciprocal values for m .

    Look at the graphs of these two equations: y 4 x 1
    and y 1 4 x 1.
    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    Perpendicular
    lines

    y
    =


    4
    x


    1

    y = x 1 14

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y
    =

    3
    x


    5

    y
    =

    3
    x

    +
    2

    Parallel
    lines

    Two numbers are negative reciprocals of each other
    if their product is 1.
    For example, 2 3 and 2 3
    are negative reciprocals.

    One fraction is the reciprocal of the other,

    and one fraction is the negative of the other.

    Since 2
    3 2
    3
    6
    6 1,

    they are negative reciprocals. 75
    75 Page 76 77
    Objective 3
    75
    How Do You Write Linear Equations?
    You can write linear equations in slope-intercept form, y mx b , or in standard form , Ax By C . In standard form, A , B , and C are

    integers, and A is usually greater than zero.
    You can nd the equation of a line given any of the following information:
    the slope and the y -intercept of the graph

    the slope and a point on the graph
    two points on the graph

    Given the slope and the y -intercept
    Identify the values for both m , the slope, and b , the y -intercept. Write the equation in slope-intercept form, y mx b , using these values.

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    What is the equation of the line with a slope of 1 3 and a y -intercept of 4?
    Find the values you should substitute into the equation y mx b .
    If the slope is 1
    3 , then m

    1
    3 .
    If the y -intercept is 4, then b 4.

    The equation of the line is:
    y mx b
    y
    1 3 x 4

    Try It Write the equation of the line with a slope of 2 and a y -intercept of 3
    5 .
    If the slope is 2, then m _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    If the y -intercept is 3 5 , then b .
    The equation of the function is:
    y mx b

    y _ _ _ _ _ x

    If the slope is 2, then m 2. If the y -intercept is 3 5 , then b 3 5 .
    The equation of the function is:

    y 2 x 3 5 76
    76 Page 77 78
    You can also use the point-slope form to write
    the equation of a line.
    y y 1 = m ( x x 1)

    Given the slope and a point on the graph
    Substitute the given values ( the x -and y -coordinates of the
    given point and m , the slope) into the slope-intercept form of the equation, y mx b .

    Solve the equation for b .
    Substitute the values for m and b into the slope-intercept form,
    y mx b .

    MAT

    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    76
    What is the equation of a line with a slope of 9, passing through the point ( 3, 4) ?
    Substitute x 3, y 4, and m 9 into the slope-intercept
    form of the equation.

    y mx b
    4 9( 3) b
    Solve for b .

    4 9( 3) b
    4 27 b
    27 27
    23 b

    Substitute the given value for m , 9, and the value you found
    for b , 23, into the slope-intercept form of the equation.

    y mx b
    y
    9 x 23
    The equation of the line is y 9 x 23.
    This equation could also be written in standard form, Ax By C , in which A is usually positive.

    y 9 x 23
    9 x 9 x
    9 x y 23

    To change 9 to a positive value, multiply both sides of the equation by 1.

    9 x y 23
    In standard form, the equation of this line is 9 x y 23.

    Do you see that . . . 77
    77 Page 78 79
    Objective 3
    77
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It Write the equation of the linear graph that has a slope of 3 and contains the point ( 6, 5) . Begin by substituting the given values into the slope-intercept form.
    The line passes through the point ( _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ ) . Therefore,
    x _ _ _ _ _ _ and y _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Since the slope equals 3, m _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    y mx b
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ b
    Find the value for _ _ _ _ _ _ that makes the equation true.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ b
    b
    _ _ _ _ _ _
    Finally, substitute the given value for m , _ _ _ _ _ _ , and the value you
    found for b , _ _ _ _ _ _ , into the slope-intercept form of the equation.
    y mx b
    y
    _ _ _ _ _ x _ _ _ _ _ _
    or
    y _ _ _ _ _ x _ _ _ _ _ _

    Begin by substituting the given values into the slope-intercept form. The line
    passes through the point ( 6, 5) . Therefore, x 6 and y 5. Since the slope
    equals 3, m 3.

    5 3 6 b
    Find the value for b that makes the equation true.
    5 18 b
    b
    13
    Finally, substitute the given value for m , 3, and the value you found for b , 13,
    into the slope-intercept form of the equation.

    y 3 x 13
    or
    y 3 x 13 78
    78 Page 79 80
    Given two points on the graph
    Use the x -coordinates and y -coordinates of the two given points
    to nd the slope, m , of the line.

    Substitute the coordinates of one of the known points and the
    slope you just found into the slope-intercept form of the equation, y mx b .

    Solve the equation for b .
    Substitute m and b into the slope-intercept form, y mx b .

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    78
    Find the equation of the line passing through the points ( 1, 2) and ( 5, 3) .
    Find the slope of the graph using the slope formula. The line
    passes through the points ( 1, 2) and ( 5, 3) .

    m x y2 2 x 1 y1 3 5 2 1 1 4

    If m is 1 4 , the slope of the line is 1 4 .
    Substitute the coordinates of either of the given points and

    the value you found for m , 1 4 , into the slope-intercept form of
    the equation. Find the value of b .
    Use ( 1, 2) or ( 5, 3) .

    Substitute the values of m and b into the slope-intercept form of
    the equation.

    y mx b
    y
    1 4 x 1 3 4

    The equation of the line passing through points ( 1, 2) and ( 5, 3)
    is y 1 4 x 1 3 4 .

    x 1, y 2
    y mx b
    2 1 4 ( 1) b

    2 1 4 b
    1
    4
    1
    4

    1 3 4 b

    x 5, y 3
    y mx b
    3 1 4 ( 5) b

    3 5 4 b
    5
    4
    5
    4

    1 3 4 b 79
    79 Page 80 81
    Objective 3
    79
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It Write the equation of the linear function that contains the points ( 4, 1) and ( 2, 3) . Find the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the graph.
    The line passes through the points ( _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ ) and
    ( _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ ) .

    m x y2 2 x 1 y1 _ _ _ _ _ _

    The slope of the line is _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Substitute the coordinates of one of the given points, ( 4, _ _ _ _ _ _ ) ,
    and the slope you found, _ _ _ _ _ _ , into the slope-intercept form of the
    equation of a line to nd the value of b .
    y mx b
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ b
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ b
    b
    _ _ _ _ _ _
    Substitute the values of m and b into the slope-intercept form.
    y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    Find the slope of the graph. The line passes through the points ( 4, 1) and ( 2, 3) .
    m y2 x2 y1 x1 3 2 1 4 2 2 1
    The slope of the line is 1.
    Substitute the coordinates of one of the given points, ( 4, 1) , and the slope
    you found, 1, into the slope-intercept form of the equation of a line to nd
    the value of b .

    1 1 4 b
    1 4 b
    b
    5
    Substitute the values of m and b into the slope-intercept form.
    y x 5 80
    80 Page 81 82
    How Do You Find the x -intercept and y -intercept for an Equation?
    Finding the x -intercept

    The x -intercept is the point where the graph of a line crosses the x -axis. The x -intercept has the coordinates ( x , 0) .

    To nd the x -intercept, substitute y 0 into the equation and solve for x . The value of x is the x -intercept. The graph of the line crosses the
    x -axis at the point ( x , 0) .

    Finding the y -intercept
    The y -intercept is the point where the graph of a line crosses the y -axis. The y -intercept has the coordinates ( 0, y ) .

    One way to nd the y -intercept is to write the equation in slope-intercept form, y mx b .
    The value of b is the y -intercept. The graph of the line crosses the y -axis at the point ( 0, b ) .
    Another way to nd the y -intercept is to substitute x 0 into the equation and solve for y .

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    80
    Here are two ways to nd the y -intercept of the graph of y 4 2 x .
    The y -intercept of the graph is 4. The graph crosses the y -axis at ( 0, 4) .
    Write the equation in slope-intercept form, y mx b .
    y 4 2 x 4 4
    y 2 x 4
    Therefore, b 4.

    Substitute x 0 and solve for y .
    y 4 2 x
    y
    4 2( 0)
    y 4 0
    y 4

    What is the x -intercept of the graph of 5 x y 10?
    Substitute y 0 into the equation and solve for x .
    5 x y 10
    5 x 0 10
    5 x 10
    x 2
    The x -intercept of the graph is 2. The graph of the line crosses the x -axis at ( 2, 0) . 81
    81 Page 82 83
    Objective 3
    81
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS What are the x -and y -intercepts of the line of 4 x 3 y 24? To nd the y -intercept, substitute x 0 into the equation and solve for y . 4 x 3 y 24
    4( 0) 3 y 24
    0 3 y 24
    3 y 24
    y 8
    The y -intercept is 8.
    To nd the x -intercept, substitute y 0 into the equation and solve for x .

    4 x 3 y 24
    4 x 3( 0) 24
    4 x 0 24
    4 x 24
    x 6
    The x -intercept is 6. 82
    82 Page 83 84
    How Do You Interpret the Meaning of Slopes and Intercepts?
    To interpret the meaning of the slope or of the x -or y -intercept of a function in a real-life problem, follow these guidelines:

    The slope of the function is the function s rate of change. A
    graph s slope tells you how fast the function s dependent variable is changing for every unit change in the independent variable.

    For example, if a graph compares wages earned in dollars to hours worked, the slope tells the rate at which you are paid, or
    how much you make per hour.

    0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25
    30
    35
    40

    1 2 3 4 5 6 78

    45
    50
    55
    60

    9 10

    y
    x
    Hours Worked

    Wages
    Earned
    ( dollars)

    y =
    5.50

    x

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    82 83
    83 Page 84 85
    Objective 3
    83
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    The y -intercept is the point where the graph of a function crosses
    the y -axis. The y -intercept has the coordinates ( 0, y ) . It is the point in the function where the independent quantity, x , has a value of 0.

    The y -intercept is often the starting point in a problem situation.
    For example, if a graph describes a constant temperature drop of 10 ° F per minute from t 0 to t 8 minutes, the y -intercept

    tells you what the temperature was at t 0. The y -intercept of the graph is ( 0, 85) , so the initial temperature was 85 ° F.

    0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25
    30
    35
    40

    1 2 3 4 5 6 78

    45
    50
    55
    60
    65
    70
    75
    80
    85

    910

    y
    x
    Time
    ( minutes)

    Temperature
    ( ° F)

    y = 10 x + 85 84
    84 Page 85 86
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    84
    Gracie took a long driving trip. She started her journey at home and drove due west for two days. The graph below represents the
    number of miles Gracie was from her home on the second day of her trip. The slope of the graph is 60, and the y -intercept
    is ( 0, 200) . Interpret the meaning of the slope and the y -intercept.

    The slope of the graph is the function s rate of change. It compares the number of miles Gracie was from home to the number of hours
    she was driving, or miles per hour. A slope of 60 means she was driving at the rate of 60 miles per hour, or that her speed was
    60 mph.
    The y -intercept is the point where the graph crosses the y -axis, when hours traveled equals 0. This point is the time when Gracie

    started driving on the second day. A y -intercept of 200 means she was already 200 miles from home when she began driving on the
    second day of her trip.

    200
    0

    400
    500

    100
    300

    245 1 3
    Hours of Driving

    Distance
    from Home
    ( miles)

    y = 60 x
    + 200

    y

    x

    The x -intercept is the point where the graph of the function crosses
    the x -axis. The x -intercept has the coordinates ( x , 0) . It is the point in the problem where the dependent quantity, y , has a

    value of 0 .
    For example, if a graph compares the height of a falling object to the number of seconds it has fallen, the x -intercept ( when the

    object s height above the ground is 0) tells you how many seconds it will take for the object to hit the ground.

    0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25
    30

    0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00
    Time
    ( seconds)

    Height
    ( feet) y = 25 16 x 2

    y

    x 85
    85 Page 86 87
    Objective 3
    85
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It The graph below shows the weight of Denise s dog Elmo over the 6-month period after she adopted him. What was the dog s weight when she adopted him? How many pounds did he gain each month during that 6-month period?

    The y -intercept of the graph is at the point ( 0, _ _ _ _ _ _ ) .
    This means Elmo weighed _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds when Denise adopted him.

    The number of pounds Elmo gained each month is the graph s rate
    of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , or its _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    To nd the slope of the graph, identify the coordinates of _ _ _ _ _ _ points on the graph.

    For example, ( 2, _ _ _ _ _ _ ) and ( _ _ _ _ _ _ , 45) are points on the graph.
    The slope of the graph is the change in the _ _ _ _ _ _ -coordinates between any two points compared to the corresponding change in

    their _ _ _ _ _ _ -coordinates.
    The slope of the graph is _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    Elmo gained _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds per month during the 6-month period.
    The y -intercept of the graph is at the point ( 0, 25) . This means Elmo weighed
    25 pounds when Denise adopted him. The number of pounds Elmo gained
    each month is the graph s rate of change, or its slope. To nd the slope of
    the graph, identify the coordinates of two points on the graph. For example,
    ( 2, 35) and ( 4, 45) are points on the graph. The slope of the graph is the
    change in the y -coordinates between any two points compared to the
    corresponding change in their x -coordinates. The slope of the graph is 45

    4 2
    35
    2
    10 5. Elmo gained 5 pounds per month during the 6-month period.

    y
    x
    20

    0

    40
    50

    10
    30

    245 1 3
    Months After Adoption

    Weight
    ( pounds)

    45
    4 86
    86 Page 87 88
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    86
    Tess is lling the gas tank of her car. The graph represents the gallons of gas in her tank in terms of the number of minutes she
    pumps gas.
    The graph crosses the y -axis at the point ( 0, 2.5) . The graph suggests that Tess had 2.5 gallons of gasoline in her car when she

    started to pump gas.
    If her car had had 7 gallons of gas in it when she started pumping gas, how would the graph be affected?

    If her gas tank had had 7 gallons instead of 2.5 gallons when she started pumping gas, the graph would pass through the y -axis at
    the point ( 0, 7) instead of ( 0, 2.5) .
    The graphs would be parallel lines.

    0
    5
    10
    15
    20
    25

    0.5 1. 0 1.5 2. 0
    Minutes

    Gallons
    of
    Gas

    y

    x

    How Do You Predict the Effects of Changing Slopes and y -intercepts in Applied Situations?
    Many real-life problems can be modeled with linear functions. To analyze such problems, it is often helpful to identify the slope and the
    y -intercept of the linear function. Interpreting the meaning of these values will help you predict the effect that changing them will have on
    the quantities in the problem.
    If the slope is changed, a rate of change in the problem will
    increase or decrease.

    If the y -intercept is changed, an initial condition will change. 87
    87 Page 88 89
    Objective 3
    87
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It Zippy s, a package-delivery service, charges $ 12 plus $ 0.08 per mile to deliver a package within the city. How would the graph of the cost of delivering a package change if Zippy s increased its mileage charge to $ 0.09 per mile?
    Write an equation that represents the cost, c , of delivering a package n miles.
    c _ _ _ _ _ _ n _ _ _ _ _ _
    In this equation 0.08 represents the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the graph of the equation.

    If the mileage charge were changed from 0.08 to 0.09, the slope of
    the graph would _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    The new line will be _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    Write an equation that represents the cost, c , of delivering a package
    n miles.

    c 0.08 n 12
    In this equation 0.08 represents the slope of the graph of the equation. If the
    mileage charge were changed from 0.08 to 0.09, the slope of the graph
    would increase. The new line will be steeper. 88
    88 Page 89 90
    How Do You Solve Problems Involving Direct Variation or Proportional Change?
    If a quantity y varies directly with a quantity x , then the linear equation representing the relationship between the two quantities is y kx . In
    this equation, k is called the proportionality constant .
    To say y varies directly with x is to say y is directly proportional to x .
    If the equation y kx were graphed, k would be the slope of the graph.
    MAT

    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 3

    88
    The price of milk varies directly with the number of quarts of milk purchased. If 5 quarts of milk cost $ 6.25, what would 3 quarts of
    milk cost?
    Write an equation that compares the number of quarts
    purchased to the cost.

    Let q the number of quarts purchased.
    Let c the cost.
    The direct variation equation is c kq .
    Substitute the known values for c and q to nd the proportionality
    constant, k . Five quarts of milk ( q 5) cost $ 6.25 ( c 6.25) .

    c kq
    6.25 k ( 5)
    1.25 k
    If k 1.25, then the proportionality constant is $ 1.25. If k 1.25, then the slope of the graph is 1.25.

    Find the cost of 3 quarts of milk by substituting k 1.25 and
    q 3 into the equation c kq .

    c kq
    c
    1.25( 3)
    c 3.75
    Three quarts of milk cost $ 3.75.

    Now practice what you ve learned. 89
    89 Page 90 91
    Objective 3
    89
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 24 Which of the following can best be described by a linear function? A The area of a circle with radius r
    B The perimeter of an equilateral triangle with side length s
    C The surface area of a cube with side length s
    D The volume of a cylinder with radius r and height h

    Question 25
    Which graph best represents the equation 2 y x 10?

    AC

    BD

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    Answer Key: page 228

    Answer Key: page 228 90
    90 Page 91 92
    Question 26
    Which of the following linear functions does not represent a rate of change of 2 3 ?

    AC

    B 2 x 3 y 12 D y 2 3 x 9
    Question 27
    The graph below shows the number of grams of beef and the number of grams of potatoes you could eat to obtain approximately 500 calories of energy.

    Which of the following numbers represents the maximum number of grams of potatoes you could eat to obtain approximately 500 calories?
    A 200 g
    B 450 g
    C 100 g
    D 150 g

    0
    100
    200
    300

    100 200 300 400

    400
    y

    Grams of Potatoes
    Grams
    of
    Beef

    x 500

    x 3159
    y 10 4 2 8

    Objective 3

    90
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3

    0 1 2 3 1 2 34

    Answer Key: page 228

    Answer Key: page 228 91
    91 Page 92 93
    Objective 3
    91
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 228
    Answer Key: page 229
    Answer Key: page 229

    Answer Key: page 229 Answer Key: page 229

    Question 28
    The graph projects a business s growth in nancial assets over a seven-year period.

    Which of the following interpretations of the graph is true?
    A The company s initial assets are $ 200,000. The expected growth rate is $ 50 per year.
    B The company s initial assets are $ 200. The expected growth rate is $ 50,000 per year.
    C The company s initial assets are $ 200,000. The expected growth rate is $ 50,000 per
    year.
    D The company s initial assets are $ 200. The expected growth rate is $ 50 per year.

    Question 29
    Which of the following equations represents a graph that is parallel to the graph of the

    equation 8 x 2 y 10 and that has a y -intercept of 8?

    A 4 x y 5
    B 4 x y 8
    C 8 x 2 y 10
    D 8 x 2 y 4

    Question 30
    The line y 3 4 x 4 is drawn on a coordinate
    grid. A second line is drawn with a slope of 1.

    Which statement best describes the relationship
    between these two graphs?

    A The second line is steeper than the rst line.
    B The graphs are perpendicular lines.
    C The second line is less steep than the rst line.

    D The graphs are parallel lines.

    Question 31
    Which equation is best represented by a line containing the points ( 2, 5) and ( 4, 3) ?

    A x 4 y 13
    B y 4 x 13
    C y 4 x 19
    D 4 x y 13

    Question 32
    Find the coordinates of the x -intercept and the y -intercept of the line 2 x 9 3 y .

    A x -intercept ( 3, 0) ; y -intercept ( 0, 9 2 )
    B x -intercept ( 0, 3) ; y -intercept ( 9 2 , 0)
    C x -intercept ( 0, 9 2 ) ) ; y -intercept ( 3, 0)
    D x -intercept ( 9 2 , 0) ; y -intercept ( 0, 3)

    0
    100
    200
    300
    400
    500

    1 2 3 4 5 67
    Year

    Assets
    ( thousands
    of dollars)

    600 92
    92 Page 93 94
    Question 33
    A local bakery sells cookies by the dozen. If you want more than one dozen cookies, the

    bakery charges by the cookie for the additional cookies. The rst graph below shows the original
    cost of buying a dozen or more cookies from the bakery. The second graph shows the cost of
    buying a dozen or more cookies after the bakery changed its prices.

    Which statement describes how the bakery changed its price for a dozen or more cookies?
    A The bakery increased the cost of the rst dozen cookies.
    B The bakery increased the cost per cookie after the rst dozen.
    C The bakery decreased the cost per cookie after the rst dozen.
    D The bakery decreased the cost of the rst dozen cookies.

    Question 34
    The number of miles Sammie walks is directly proportional to the number of minutes she

    walks. If Sammie walks 3 miles in 45 minutes, what is the constant of proportionality, and how
    far would she walk in 2.5 hours?

    A 1 1 5 ; 10 miles
    B 1 1 5 ; 16.6 miles
    C 15; 37.5 miles
    D 15; 225 miles

    0
    $ 4
    $ 8
    $ 12
    $ 16

    12 16 20 24
    Number of Cookies

    Cost
    Original
    cost
    New cost

    Objective 3

    92
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Answer Key: page 229 Answer Key: page 229 93
    93 Page 94 95
    The student will formulate and use linear equations and inequalities.
    Objective 4 MAT
    H
    E

    MAT I CS

    93
    The combined weight of 3 people in a small plane cannot safely
    exceed 620 pounds. The pilot weighs 185 pounds, and Ramon
    weighs 1 1 2 times as much as his wife Grace. Altogether they do
    not exceed the weight limit. Write an inequality that could be used
    to nd Grace s maximum possible weight.
    Represent the quantities involved with variables or expressions.
    You know that Ramon s weight is 1.5 times Grace s weight. Represent Grace s weight with g .

    Ramon weighs 1.5 times his wife s weight, or 1.5 g .

    For this objective you should be able to
    formulate linear equations and inequalities from problem
    situations, use a variety of methods to solve them, and analyze the solutions; and

    formulate systems of linear equations from problem situations,
    use a variety of methods to solve them, and analyze the solutions.

    How Do You Solve Problems Using Linear Equations or Inequalities?
    Many real-life problems can be solved using either a linear equation or an inequality. To solve the equation or inequality, follow these steps:

    Simplify the expressions in the equation or inequality by
    removing parentheses and combining like terms.

    Isolate the variable as a single term on one side of the equation
    by adding or subtracting expressions on both sides of the equation or inequality.

    Use multiplication or division to produce a coef cient of 1 for
    the variable term.

    When solving an inequality, you must reverse the inequality
    symbol if you multiply or divide both sides by a negative number.

    2 x 10

    2
    2x 10
    2 Divide both sides by a negative number.
    x 5

    The inequality symbol reversed; it went from to .
    Use the solution of the equation or inequality to nd the answer
    to the question asked.

    See whether your answer is reasonable.

    An algebraic sentence written using the symbol
    , , , or is called an inequality.

    Do you see that . . . 94
    94 Page 95 96
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 4

    94
    Write the inequality.
    Grace s weight Ramon s weight the pilot s weight must be less than or equal to 620 pounds.

    g 1.5 g 185 620
    1 g 1.5 g 185 620
    2.5 g 185 620
    The inequality 2.5 g 185 620 could be used to nd Grace s maximum possible weight.

    In the school Adopt-a-Highway program, Trent picked up twice as many empty soda cans as Susan did but only one-third as many as
    Ginger collected. Together, the team picked up 135 cans. How many cans did Trent pick up?

    Represent the unknown quantities with variables or expressions.
    The number of cans each team member picked up is described in terms of the number of cans Trent picked up. Represent the

    number of cans Trent picked up using the variable t .
    Susan picked up 1 2 as many cans as Trent.
    Ginger picked up 3 times as many cans as Trent.
    Trent Susan Ginger
    t 0.5 t 3 t
    Write an equation that can be used to solve the problem.
    Together the team picked up 135 cans.

    t 0.5 t 3 t 135
    Simplify the expression by combining like terms. Then solve
    the equation for t .

    1 t 0.5 t 3 t 135
    ( 1 0.5 3) t 135
    4.5 t 135
    t 30
    In this problem, the solution to the equation, t 30, is also the answer to the problem. Trent picked up 30 empty soda cans. 95
    95 Page 96 97
    Objective 4
    95
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS The width of a rectangle is between 5 and 10 inches. If its length is 1 inch more than twice its width, what is a reasonable range for the rectangle s perimeter? Its width can be represented by w . Its length can be represented by 2 w 1.
    Its perimeter can be represented by P .
    P 2 l 2 w
    P
    2( 2 w 1) 2 w
    P
    4 w 2 2 w
    P
    6 w 2
    Find a reasonable range for P .
    Substitute Substitute w 5 w 1 0

    ( 6 w 2) P ( 6 w 2)
    ( 6 5 2) P ( 6 10 2)
    ( 30 2) P ( 60 2)
    32 P 62
    Any perimeter between 32 inches and 62 inches would be reasonable.

    An illustrator wants to produce a series of pen-and-ink drawings. The height of each drawing must be at least 1 inch more than
    1
    3 its width. This relationship is represented in the graph below.

    If a drawing 6 inches wide is 5 inches tall, does it meet the requirements?
    Find the 6 on the x -axis and then go up to the shaded region in the graph. Is the point ( 6, 5) in the shaded region? Yes.
    Then a 6-inch-by-5-inch drawing meets the requirements.

    0
    2
    4
    6

    2 4 6810
    Height
    ( inches)

    Width
    ( inches)

    Reasonable solutions
    lie in the shaded area.
    y

    x
    ( 6, 5) 96
    96 Page 97 98
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 4

    96
    Try It The length of a rectangle is 5 inches greater than its width. If the
    width of the rectangle is represented by w and its perimeter is represented by P , write an equation in terms of P and w that could
    be used to nd the dimensions of the rectangle.
    Represent the width of the rectangle by w .

    The length of the rectangle is 5 inches _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ its width.

    Represent the length by w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . Write an equation and simplify it.
    P 2 l 2 w
    P
    2( w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 2 w
    P
    2 w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 w
    P
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    The equation P _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ could be used to nd the dimensions of the rectangle.

    The length of the rectangle is 5 inches greater than its width. Represent the
    length by w 5.

    P 2 l 2 w
    P
    2( w 5) 2 w
    P
    2 w 10 2 w
    P
    4 w 10
    The equation P 4 w 10 could be used to nd the dimensions of the
    rectangle. 97
    97 Page 98 99
    Objective 4
    97
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It Saul used two different types of trim molding on a woodworking project. He used 6 feet more of the molding that cost $ 2.50 per foot than he used of the molding that cost $ 1.50 per foot. If the combined cost of the molding used to complete his project was $ 55, how many
    feet of each type of molding did Saul use?
    Represent the number of feet of $ 1.50-per-foot molding with m .
    Represent the number of feet of $ 2.50-per-foot molding with
    m _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    Represent the cost of the $ 1.50 molding used.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Represent the cost of the $ 2.50 molding used.
    2.50( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ )
    Write an equation that shows the total cost as $ 55 and solve for m .
    1.50 m 2.50( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 55
    1.50 m 2.50 m _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 55
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ m 15 55
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ m _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    m _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Saul used _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ feet of molding that cost $ 1.50 per foot.
    He used m 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ feet of molding that cost $ 2.50 per foot.

    Represent the number of feet of $ 2.50-per-foot molding with m 6.
    Represent the cost of the $ 1.50 molding used: 1.50 m . Represent the cost
    of the $ 2.50 molding used: 2.50( m 6) .

    1.50 m 2.50( m 6) 55
    1.50 m 2.50 m 15 55
    4 m 15 55
    4 m 40
    m 10
    Saul used 10 feet of molding that cost $ 1.50 per foot. He used
    m 6 10 6 16 feet of molding that cost $ 2.50 per foot. 98
    98 Page 99 100
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 4

    98
    Try It A farmer sells peaches and decorative baskets at a roadside stand.
    He sells the baskets for $ 4.95 each and the peaches for $ 0.69 per pound. The equation p 0.69 w 4.95 represents the price, p ,
    of a basket containing w pounds of peaches. The graph of this relationship is shown below.

    Use the graph to nd a reasonable value for the number of pounds of peaches in a decorative basket that would sell for $ 10.00 altogether.
    Go to the point on the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ axis where the cost is approximately $ 10.00.
    Go _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ until you reach the graph.
    Go _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ to the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ axis and read the value there.

    The corresponding value is greater than _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    A reasonable value for the number of pounds of peaches in a basket
    costing $ 10.00 is about _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ pounds.

    Go to the point on the vertical axis where the cost is approximately $ 10.00.
    Go across until you reach the graph. Go down to the horizontal axis and read
    the value there. The corresponding value is greater than 7. A reasonable value
    for the number of pounds of peaches in a basket costing $ 10.00 is

    about 7 1 3 pounds.

    16
    10
    15
    11
    12
    13
    14

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 891011

    7
    8
    9

    12
    Weight
    ( pounds)

    Price
    ( dollars)

    p

    w 99
    99 Page 100 101
    Objective 4
    99
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Do You Represent Problems Using a System of Linear Equations?
    Many real-life problems can be solved using a system of two or more linear equations.

    To r epresent a problem using a system of linear equations, follow these guidelines.
    Identify the quantities involved and the relationships between
    them.

    Represent the quantities involved with two different variables or
    with expressions involving two variables.

    Write two independent equations that can be used to solve the
    problem.

    The sum of two numbers is 100. Twice the rst number plus three times the second number is 275. Write a system of two equations
    in two unknowns that could be used to nd the two numbers.
    The problem involves two numbers. One number is not described in terms of the other number, so it makes sense to represent them

    using two different variables.
    Represent the rst number with the variable x .

    Represent the second number with the variable y .

    You know two different relationships between the numbers.
    Their sum is 100.

    x y 100
    Twice the rst number plus three times the second number is 275.

    twice the rst three times the second 275
    2 x 3 y 275
    The following system of linear equations could be used to nd the two numbers.

    x y 100
    2 x 3 y 275

    A system of linear equations is two or more
    linear equations that use two or more variables.
    For example,
    2 x y 10
    x 3 y 9

    is a system of two linear equations in

    two unknowns. 100
    100 Page 101 102
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 4

    100
    Try It Daniel put all the pennies and nickels from his pocket change into a
    jar. At the end of the month, there were 210 coins in his jar, worth $ 3.30 in all. Write a system of two equations that can be used to
    nd p , the number of pennies, and n , the number of nickels, in the jar at the end of the month.

    The value of a group of mixed coins depends on the value of each type of coin.

    The number of any one type of coin times its _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ gives the total value of all the coins of that type.
    Represent the number of coins of each type Daniel had in his jar. Represent the number of pennies with the variable p .
    Represent the number of nickels with the variable n .
    Represent the total value in cents of each type of coin in his jar.

    Represent the value of the pennies with the expression _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Represent the value of the nickels with the expression _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Write two equations that describe the relationships between these quantities:

    The number of pennies the number of nickels _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ coins
    in the jar:
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    The value of the pennies the value of the nickels _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    cents in the jar:
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    The following system of equations could be used to nd the number of each type of coin Daniel has in his jar:

    p n _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ n _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 101
    101 Page 102 103
    Objective 4
    101
    The solution to a system of linear equations is a pair
    of numbers that makes both equations true.

    For example, the ordered pair ( 4, 2) is a solution
    to the following system of equations:

    2 x y 10
    x y 2

    because when x 4 and y 2, each equation is

    true.

    The number of any one type of coin times its value gives the total value
    of all the coins of that type. Represent the value of the pennies with the
    expression 1 p . Represent the value of the nickels with the expression 5 n .
    The number of pennies the number of nickels 210 coins in the jar:
    p n 210. The value of the pennies the value of the nickels 330
    cents in the jar: 1 p 5 n 330. The following system of equations could
    be used to nd the number of each type of coin Daniel has in his jar:

    p n 210
    1 p 5 n 330

    If the two lines as shown by this graph then the system of equations
    intersect at a has one solution: single point x 1 and y 2
    or ( 1, 2) .

    do not intersect ( parallel lines) has no solution.

    intersect at every point has many solutions.
    ( the same line)

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 12345
    2 x
    +
    y
    =
    4

    4 x
    +
    2
    y

    =
    8

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 12345
    2 x
    +
    y
    =
    4

    2 x
    +
    y
    =
    1

    How Do You Solve a System of Linear Equations?
    You can solve a system of linear equations algebraically and graphically. Two algebraic methods are substitution and elimination.

    A graph can show you how many solutions a system of equations has.

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 12345
    2 x
    +
    y
    =
    4

    x
    y =
    1

    ( 1, 2)

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS 102
    102 Page 103 104
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 4

    102
    You can also determine the number of solutions a system of equations has by writing the equations in slope-intercept form, y mx b .
    Solve this system of equations using the graphical method.
    x y 2
    2 x y 5
    The two equations are graphed below.

    The coordinates of the point where the two lines intersect, ( 3, 1) , is the solution to the system of equations. The coordinates satisfy
    both equations.

    The solution to the system of equations is ( 3, 1) .

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    x
    + y

    =
    2

    2 x

    y
    =

    5

    ( 3, 1)

    x y 22 x y 5
    x 3 x y 22 x y 5
    and ( 3) ( 1) 2 2( 3) ( 1) 5 y 1 2 25 5

    If the two equations as shown by this system then the system of equations
    have different values 2 x y 4 y 2 x 4has one solution: for mx y 1 y x 1 x 1 and y 2.
    have different values for b but the same 2 x y 4 y 2 x 4 ( b 4) has no solution.
    value for m 2 x y 1 y 2 x 1 ( b 1)
    have the same 2 x y 4 y 2 x 4 has many solutions. values for m and b 4 x 2 y 8 y 2 x 4 103
    103 Page 104 105
    Objective 4
    103
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Solve the following system of equations using the substitution
    method.
    a b 30
    2 a 3 b 10
    This system of equations lends itself to being solved using substitution because the rst equation can be solved easily for

    a in terms of b .
    To solve the rst equation for a , subtract b from both sides.
    a b 30
    b b
    a
    30 b
    Now substitute ( 30 b ) for a in the second equation.
    The result will be a linear equation with just one variable.
    Solve that equation.
    2 a 3 b 10
    2( 30 b ) 3 b 10 Substitute ( 30 b ) for a .
    60 2 b 3 b 10 Remove parentheses; multiply by 2.
    60 5 b 10 Combine like terms: 2 b 3 b 5 b .
    60 10 5 b Add 5 b to both sides.
    50 5 b Subtract 10 from both sides.
    10 b Divide both sides by 5.
    Now that you know the value of b , you can use this value to nd the value of a by substituting the value of b into either of the two

    original equations.
    In this system, the rst equation is the easier equation to use.
    a b 30
    a 10 30 Substitute b 10.
    a 20 Subtract 10 from both sides.
    The solution to the system of equations is a 20 and b 10, or ( 20, 10) .

    When you use the substitution method to solve a system of equations, solve one equation for one of the two variables. Then substitute into
    the second equation. 104
    104 Page 105 106
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 4

    104
    Solve the same system of equations using the elimination method.
    a b 30
    2 a 3 b 10
    In the given system of equations, if you multiply both sides of the rst equation by 3, you get the following equations:

    3 ( a b) 3( 30) 3 a 3 b 90
    2 a 3 b 10 2 a 3 b 10
    The variable b has a coef cient of 3 in the new equation and an opposite coef cient of 3 in the original second equation. When

    you add those two equations, the term containing b will disappear because it will have a 0 coef cient.

    3 a 3 b 90
    2 a 3 b 10
    5 a 100
    a 20
    To nd b , substitute 20 for a into the rst equation.
    a b 30
    20 b 30
    b 10
    The solution to the system of equations is a 20 and b 10, or ( 20, 10) . This is the same solution obtained by using the

    substitution method.

    Do you see that . . .

    The elimination method is also called the addition method because you eliminate one of the variables by adding. Before you add, you may need
    to multiply one or both equations so that one of the variables has opposite coef cients. 105
    105 Page 106 107
    Objective 4
    105
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It At the concession stand a can of soda costs $ 0.25 more than a bottle of water. If John bought 3 bottles of water and 2 cans of soda for $ 8, how much did each type of drink cost? Let s represent the cost of a can of soda.
    Let w represent the cost of a bottle of water.
    If a can of soda costs $ 0.25 more than a bottle of water, then an equation that can be used to represent this is

    s w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    If 3 bottles of water and 2 cans of soda cost $ 8, then an equation that can be used to represent this is

    3_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8.
    Solve the system of equations using the substitution method. Substitute w 0.25 for s in the second equation and solve.

    3 w 2 s 8.00
    3 w 2( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 8.00
    3 w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8.00
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ w 0.50 8.00
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ w 7.50
    w _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    A bottle of water costs $ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    A can of soda costs s w 0.25 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.25 $ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    If a can of soda costs $ 0.25 more than a bottle of water, then an equation
    that can be used to represent this is s w 0.25. If 3 bottles of water and
    2 cans of soda cost $ 8, then an equation that can be used to represent this
    is 3 w 2 s 8.

    3 w 2 s 8.00
    3 w 2( w 0.25) 8.00
    3 w 2 w 0.50 8.00
    5 w 0.50 8.00
    5 w 7.50
    w 1.50
    A bottle of water costs $ 1.50.
    A can of soda costs s w 0.25 1.50 0.25 $ 1.75.

    Now practice what you ve learned. 106
    106 Page 107 108
    Objective 4
    106
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 35
    Jeanne wants to build a fence to enclose an area for a new rose garden. She can afford 150 feet of

    fencing. The length of the rectangular garden will be 5 feet more than the width, w . Which inequality
    best describes the possible width of her garden?
    A w ( w 5) 150
    B 2 w 2( w 5) 150
    C 2 w 2( w 5) 150
    D w ( w 5) 150

    Question 36
    Sharon kept track of her expenses last week. She spent $ 4 more on movie rentals than she did on

    lunches. She spent ve times as much xing her car as she did on movie rentals. If Sharon spent
    a total of $ 80 last week on these three expenses, how much did her car repairs cost?

    A $ 8
    B $ 12
    C $ 60
    D $ 14

    Question 37
    The sum of two numbers is 59. The difference between 2 times the rst number and 6 times

    the second is 34. Find the two numbers.
    A 40 and 19
    B 38 and 97
    C 38 and 97
    D 40 and 19

    Question 38
    Each morning at his bagel shop, Sid makes at least three times as many plain bagels as he does

    onion bagels and 25 more onion bagels than garlic bagels. The graph below represents the
    relationship between the number of plain bagels, p , and the number of garlic bagels, g , Sid
    prepares each day.

    Which statement below does not satisfy this inequality relationship?
    A Sid made 100 garlic bagels and 390 plain bagels.
    B Sid made 50 garlic bagels and 225 plain bagels.
    C Sid made 25 garlic bagels and 125 plain bagels.
    D Sid made 75 garlic bagels and 300 plain bagels.

    275
    300
    325
    350
    375
    400

    225
    250

    25
    50
    75
    100
    125
    150
    175
    200

    0255075100

    p
    g
    Answer Key: page 230

    Answer Key: page 230
    Answer Key: page 230 Answer Key: page 231 107
    107 Page 108 109
    Question 39
    Ira wants to build a rectangular dog kennel adjacent to the back wall of his garage.

    Using the garage wall as the fourth side of the kennel allows him to fence only three sides of
    the kennel. The fencing material he is using costs $ 4 per foot. Ira has $ 120 to spend on the
    project. If the back wall of the garage is 20 feet long, what is the maximum width Ira can make
    the kennel?
    A 10 ft
    B 60 ft
    C 100 ft
    D 5 ft

    Question 40
    Look at the following system of equations.
    3 x 2 y 14
    6 x 2 y 32
    Which of the following is a description of the solution for this system?

    A An in nite number of solutions
    B No solution
    C One solution
    D Two solutions

    Question 41
    Sandra spent $ 48.40 on tickets for a movie sneak preview. She bought 3 adult tickets and

    5 child tickets. If the cost of an adult ticket, a , is twice as much as the cost of a child ticket, c ,
    what is the cost of each kind of ticket?
    A a $ 8.80 c $ 4.40

    B a $ 13.82 c $ 6.91
    C a $ 4.40 c $ 2.20
    D a $ 6.91 c $ 3.46

    Question 42
    An ice-cream store projects that the pro t, p , it earns on a total sales volume of s dollars is

    given by the formula p 0.25( s 3000) . If sales for the next month are projected to be
    between $ 5000 and $ 7000, what range best represents the total profit the store can
    expect for that month?
    A 500 p 1000
    B 5000 p 7000
    C 0 p 2000
    D 2000 p 4000

    20 ft
    Kennel Garage

    Objective 4

    107
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 231 Answer Key: page 231
    Answer Key: page 231
    Answer Key: page 231 108
    108 Page 109 110
    Objective 4
    108
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 43
    The members of a school choir had a fund-raising drive last month. They sold candy bars

    for $ 2 each and cans of popcorn for $ 5 each. Brent sold more than $ 300 worth of candy and popcorn
    altogether. Brent s sales can be represented by the inequality 5 x 2 y 300.

    Which of the following points could not reasonably represent the number of candy bars and cans of
    popcorn sold by Brent last month?
    A ( 30, 90)
    B ( 40, 80)
    C ( 20, 50)
    D ( 50, 40)

    Question 44
    The Beachfront Resort charges its guests according to the number of nights they stay

    at the resort and the number of meals they eat there. A guest can stay 2 nights and have
    5 meals for $ 395, or a guest can stay 5 nights and have 11 meals for $ 959. Which system of
    equations can be used to nd n , the cost of a night s stay, and m , the cost of a meal?

    A 5 n 2 m 395 11 n 5 m 959
    B 5 n 2 m 959 11 n 5 m 395
    C 2 n 5 m 959 5 n 11 m 395
    D 2 n 5 m 395 5 n 11 m 959

    Question 45
    Rachel is selling watermelons for $ 2 each and cantaloupes for $ 1 each. A customer bought a

    total of 13 watermelons and cantaloupes for $ 20. Which system of equations best describes the
    number of watermelons, w , and the number of cantaloupes, c , the customer bought?

    A w c 20 w 2 c 13
    B w c 13 w 2 c 20
    C w c 20 2 w c 13
    D w c 13 2 w c 20

    0
    20
    40
    60
    80
    100
    120
    140

    10 20 30 40 50 60
    Candy
    Bars

    Cans of Popcorn
    x

    y

    Answer Key: page 232 Answer Key: page 232
    Answer Key: page 232 109
    109 Page 110 111
    The student will demonstrate an understanding of quadratic and other
    nonlinear functions.

    Objective 5

    For this objective you should be able to
    interpret and describe the effects of changes in the parameters
    of quadratic functions;

    solve quadratic equations using appropriate methods; and

    apply the laws of exponents in problem-solving situations.

    What Is a Quadratic Function?
    A quadratic function is any function whose graph is a parabola.
    A quadratic equation is any equation that can be written in the
    form y ax 2 bx c. The constants a , b , and c are called the parameters of the equation. When you know their values, they

    help you describe the shape and location of the parabola.
    The simplest quadratic function is y x 2 . It is the quadratic parent function.

    The graph of the quadratic function y x 2 4 is shown below.
    y

    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345

    y -intercept
    point where the graph
    crosses the y -axis

    axis of symmetry
    roots
    the solutions to the
    quadratic equation

    x -intercept( s)
    point( s) where the
    graph crosses
    the x -axis

    vertex
    minimum or maximum value

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 123 4
    y = x 2

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    109 110
    110 Page 111 112
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    110
    What Happens to the Graph of y = ax 2 When a Is Changed?
    If two quadratic functions of the form y ax 2 differ only in the sign of the coef cient of x 2 , then one graph will be a re ection of the other

    graph across the x -axis.
    If a 0, then the parabola opens upward.

    If a 0, then the parabola opens downward.

    How do the graphs of y 3 x 2 and y 3 x 2 compare?
    In one function, a 3. In the other function, a 3. Each graph is a re ection of the other across the x -axis.

    The graph of y 3 x 2 opens upward because 3 0.
    The graph of y 3 x 2 opens downward because 3 0.
    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y = 3 x 2

    y = 3 x 2 111
    111 Page 112 113
    Objective 5
    111
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    If two quadratic functions of the form y ax 2 have different coef cients of x 2 , then one graph will be wider than the other. The smaller the
    absolute value of a, the coef cient of x 2 , the wider the graph.

    Which of these three functions produces the narrowest graph?
    y 2 3 x 2 y 2 x 2 y 4 x 2
    Compare the absolute value of the three coef cients of x 2 .
    In the rst function the coef cient of x 2 is 2
    3 .

    In the second function the coef cient of x 2 is 2.

    In the last function it is 4.
    Since 2
    3

    2
    3 , then
    2
    3 has the least absolute value. The graph

    of y 2 3 x 2 produces the widest parabola.
    Since 4 4, then 4 has the greatest absolute value.
    The graph of y 4 x 2 produces the narrowest parabola.

    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y = 4 x 2

    y
    =

    2
    x

    2

    y
    =

    x
    2

    23

    See Objective 3,
    page 70, for more
    information about
    absolute value. 112
    112 Page 113 114
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    112
    If the coef cient of x 2 in the function y x 2 is changed to 2, what is the effect on the graph?
    First nd the effect of changing the sign of a . Then nd the effect of changing its value.
    If the coef cient of x 2 changes from positive 1 to negative 1, the
    new graph will be a re ection of the original graph. The graph of y x 2 will be a re ection of the graph of y x 2 across the

    x -axis.
    If the coef cient of x 2 changes from 1 to 2, the graph
    becomes narrower because | 2| | 1| . The graph of y 2 x 2 will be narrower than the graph of y 1 x 2 .

    The graph of y 2 x 2 is narrower than the graph of y x 2 , and it opens down, not up.
    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    y = 2 x 2

    y = x 2 113
    113 Page 114 115
    Objective 5
    113
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Two quadratic functions are graphed below. y 1 3 x 2 y 5 x 2

    Which parabola is the graph of y 1 3 x 2 ?
    Which parabola is the graph of y 5 x 2 ?

    Compare the absolute values of the coef cients of x 2 .
    Since 1
    3 is the smaller value, y

    1
    3 x
    2 produces the wider graph.

    Since 5 is the greater value, y 5 x 2 produces the narrower
    graph.

    Parabola r is the graph of y 1 3 x 2 , and parabola t is the graph of y 5 x 2 .

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    r t 114
    114 Page 115 116
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    114
    What Happens to the Graph of y x 2 c When c Is Changed?
    If two quadratic functions of the form y x 2 c have different constants, c , then one graph will be a translation up or down of the

    other graph.

    How does the graph of y x 2 4 compare to the graph of y x 2 ?
    In the function y x 2 4, the constant 4 has been added to the parent function y x 2 .

    The graph of y x 2 has been translated up 4 units.
    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

    y = x 2 + 4
    y = x 2

    How does the graph of y x 2 2 compare to the graph of y x 2 ?
    In the function y x 2 2, the constant 2 has been added to the parent function y x 2 .

    The graph of y x 2 has been translated down 2 units.
    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y
    =

    x
    2

    y = x 2 2 115
    115 Page 116 117
    Objective 5
    115
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS How many units apart are the vertices of the graphs of y x
    2 3
    and y x 2 1?
    Adding the constant 3 to the parent function y x 2 causes the
    parent function to be translated 3 units up.

    Adding the constant 1 to the parent function y x 2 causes
    the parent function to be translated 1 unit down.

    Look at the graphs of the two functions.

    The vertex of the graph of y x 2 3 is 4 units higher than the vertex of the graph of y x 2 1.
    y
    x
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    12
    13
    14

    15

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y
    =

    x
    2

    1

    y
    =

    x
    2
    +
    3
    116
    116 Page 117 118
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    116
    Try It The graph of the function y x 2 2 is translated 5 units up. . The
    equation y x 2 2 and the translated function are graphed below. .

    What is the equation of the translated graph?
    In the equation y x 2 2, , c _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    If the graph is translated 5 units up, then the value of c increases
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units.
    The value of c goes from _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ to _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    The equation of the translated function is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    In the equation y x 2 2, , c 2. If the graph is translated 5 units up, then
    the value of c increases 5 units. The value of c goes from 2 to 3. The
    equation of the translated function is y x 2 3.

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y
    =

    x
    2

    2 117
    117 Page 118 119
    Objective 5
    117
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Do You Draw Conclusions from the Graphs of Quadratic Equations?
    To analyze graphs of quadratic equations and draw conclusions from them, consider the following.
    Understand the problem. Identify the quantities involved and the
    relationship between them.

    Identify the quantities represented on the graph by using the
    horizontal and vertical axes and looking at the scales used.

    Find the x -intercepts and y -intercept of the graph and determine
    what these values represent in the problem.

    Decide whether the graph has a minimum or maximum point
    and determine what this value represents in the problem.

    A golf ball was hit into the air. The graph below shows the height of the ball t seconds after it was hit.

    What conclusions about the ball s path can you draw from the graph?
    The horizontal axis represents time in seconds. The vertical axis represents the height of the ball in feet.
    The point ( 0, 0) on the graph tells you that at 0 seconds the
    height of the ball was 0 feet.

    The greatest value of the function is at the vertex, ( 3, 144) . This
    means that the maximum height of the ball was 144 feet and that it took 3 seconds for the ball to reach this height.

    The point ( 6, 0) on the graph tells you that at 6 seconds the ball
    was back on the ground, at 0 feet. The ball was in the air a total of 6 seconds.

    0
    20
    40

    1 23

    60
    80
    100
    120
    140
    160

    4 56

    h
    t
    Time
    ( seconds)

    Height
    ( feet)

    ( 3, 144)

    ( 6, 0) ( 0, 0) 118
    118 Page 119 120
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    118
    Try It If a stone is dropped from any height, its distance, d , from the
    ground is modeled by the quadratic equation d 16 t 2 h , where t is the number of seconds it falls and h is the height in feet from
    which it was dropped.
    The graph below models the distance from the ground of a stone dropped from the top of a tall building.

    From what height was the stone dropped?
    The stone was dropped when t _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    On this graph, t 0 at the point ( 0, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) .
    The stone was dropped from a height of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ feet.

    The stone was dropped when t 0. On this graph, t 0 at the point ( 0, 275) .
    The stone was dropped from a height of 275 feet.

    0
    50
    100
    150
    200
    250

    1 234
    Distance
    from
    Ground
    ( feet)

    Time
    ( seconds) 119
    119 Page 120 121
    Objective 5
    119
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Can You Solve a Quadratic Equation Graphically?
    To nd solutions to the quadratic equation ax 2 bx c 0, you can look at the graph of the related quadratic function, y ax 2 bx c .

    A quadratic equation can have 0, 1, or 2 solutions. The number of solutions is shown by the graph of the related quadratic function.

    The solutions to a quadratic function are the graph s x -intercepts, the x -coordinates of the points where the graph crosses the x -axis.
    The solutions can also be called:
    the roots of the quadratic function

    the zeros of the quadratic function

    y
    x
    0 solutions

    1 solution
    x
    2 solutions 120
    120 Page 121 122
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    120
    What are the solutions to the equation x 2 3 x 4 0?
    The graph of y x 2 3 x 4 is shown below.

    The points where the graph crosses the x -axis are the points
    ( 1, 0) and ( 4, 0) . The x -coordinates of these points are 1 and 4.

    The roots, or the zeros, of the function y x 2 3 x 4 are 1
    and 4.

    Therefore, the solution set of the equation x 2 3 x 4 0 is
    { 4, 1} .

    You can verify that these numbers are solutions by replacing x with their value in the quadratic equation.

    Substitute x 1 Substitute x 4
    x 2 3 x 4 0 x 2 3 x 4 0
    ( 1) 2 3( 1) 4  0( 4) 2 3( 4) 4  0
    1 3 4  016 12 4  0
    0 00 0
    Both numbers make the equation true. Both 1 and 4 are solutions.

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 121
    121 Page 122 123
    How Can You Solve a Quadratic Equation by Using a Table?
    You can use the values representing a quadratic function in a table to nd solutions to a quadratic equation.

    Identify the points in the table that have y -values of 0.
    The x -values of those points are the solutions to the equation.

    Objective 5

    121
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    The table below models the function f ( x ) x 2 6 x 5. Find solutions to the equation x 2 6 x 5 0.

    The roots of the function are the x -coordinates of the points where the y -coordinate is 0.
    Look for any points in the table where the y -coordinate is 0.
    The points ( 1, 0) and ( 5, 0) are points where the y -coordinate is 0. The x -values of these points are 1 and 5.

    The solution set of the quadratic equation x 2 6 x 5 0 is { 5, 1} .
    You can con rm that these are the solutions by replacing x with these values in the equation x 2 6 x 5 0.
    Substitute x 1 Substitute x 5
    x 2 6 x 5 0 x 2 6 x 5 0
    ( 1) 2 6( 1) 5  0 ( 5) 2 6( 5) 5  0
    1 6 5  0 25 30 5  0
    0 00 0
    Both numbers make the equation true. Both 1 and 5 are solutions.

    xy
    05
    1 0
    2 3
    3 4
    4 3
    5 0
    6 5 122
    122 Page 123 124
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    122
    How Can You Solve a Quadratic Equation by Factoring?
    A quadratic equation can be solved by factoring the quadratic expression and then setting its factors equal to zero.

    F L

    Do you see that . . .

    Find the solution to the quadratic equation x 2 x 12 0.
    This quadratic equation can be solved by factoring because the quadratic expression x 2 x 12 can be written as the product

    of two factors, x 4 and x 3.
    x 2 x 12 ( x 4) ( x 3)
    To verify that this equation is true, use the FOIL method to multiply the two binomials.

    ( x 4) ( x 3)
    F irst x x x 2
    O uter x 3 3 x
    I nner 4 x 4 x
    L ast 4 3 12
    FOIL x 2 3 x 4 x 12
    x 2 x 12
    Write the left side of the equation as a product of these two factors.
    x 2 x 12 0
    ( x 4) ( x 3) 0

    The product of two factors is 0 only if either of the factors is 0. Set each factor in the equation equal to 0 and solve for x .
    x 4 0 x 3 0
    x 4 x 3
    The solutions of the quadratic equation are 4 and 3.
    Check both values of x to verify that the equation is true.
    Substitute x 4 Substitute x 3
    x 2 x 12 0 x 2 x 12 0
    ( 4) 2 4 12  0( 3) 2 ( 3) 12  0
    16 4 12  09 3 12  0
    0 00 0

    F L
    O I 123
    123 Page 124 125
    Objective 5
    123
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A rectangular garden is 1 foot longer than it is wide. Find the length and width of the garden if its area is 42 square feet.
    If the width is represented by w , then the length can be
    represented by w 1.

    Substitute these expressions into the formula for the area of a
    rectangle to model the problem situation with an equation.

    A lw
    42 ( w 1) w
    To nd the width of the garden, solve this equation for w .
    First write the equation in standard quadratic form, ax 2 bx c 0.

    w ( w 1) 42
    w 2 w 42
    w 2 w 42 0
    The quadratic expression w 2 w 42 can be factored.

    w 2 w 42 ( w 7) ( w 6)
    Rewrite the equation with the quadratic expression factored.
    ( w 7) ( w 6) 0
    Set each factor equal to 0 and solve for w .

    w 7 0 w 6 0
    w 7 w 6
    Width cannot be a negative value, so the solution w 7 is
    not used. Use w 6 as the solution to the equation.

    The width of the garden is 6 feet. The length is w 1, which is equal to 6 1, or 7 feet.

    In real-life problems modeled by quadratic equations, not all the solutions of the equation may make sense in the problem.
    Do you see that . . . 124
    124 Page 125 126
    Objective 5
    124
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    How Can You Solve a Quadratic Equation by Using the Quadratic Formula?
    Another method used to solve quadratic equations is the quadratic formula. This method can be used to solve all quadratic equations.

    The Quadratic Formula
    The solutions to a quadratic equation in the standard form ax 2 bx c 0 are given by the formula

    x b b 2a 2 4 a c
    where a , b , and c are the parameters of the quadratic equation.

    Find the solutions to the equation x 2 x 2 0.
    The quadratic equation x 2 x 2 0 is written in standard
    form. Identify the values of the constants a , b , and c .

    a 1
    b 1
    c 2
    Substitute these values for a , b, and c in the quadratic formula,
    simplify the expression, and represent the two solutions separately.

    x
    x

    1
    2
    3

    x 1 2 3 2 2 1 and x 1 2 3 2 4 2
    The solutions to the equation are 1 and 2.

    1 9
    2

    1 1 2 4 ( 1) ( 2 )
    2( 1)

    b b 2 4 ac
    2 a

    When you nd the square root of a number,
    remember to add the  symbol in front of the
    square root symbol, .
    For example,
    x 2 9
    x 2  9
    x 
    shows that ( 3) 2 9 and ( 3) 2 9. 125
    125 Page 126 127
    Objective 5
    125
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Find the solutions to the equation 2 x
    2 4 x 3 0.
    The quadratic equation 2 x 2 4 x 3 0 is written in standard
    form. The values of the constants a , b , and c are its parameters.

    a 2
    b 4
    c 3
    Substitute these values for a , b, and c in the quadratic formula,
    simplify the expression, and represent the two solutions separately.

    x
    x
    x
    4 4 40
    x 4 4 40 and x 4 4 40
    To approximate the roots of the equation, evaluate the nal
    expressions using 40 6.32.

    x 4 4 6.32 0.58
    x 4 4 6.32 2.58
    The solutions to the equation are x 0.58 and x 2.58.

    4 4 2 4( ( 2) ( 3)
    2( 2)

    b b 2 4 ac
    2 a 126
    126 Page 127 128
    Try It Estimate the roots of the equation 4 x 2 1 8 x .
    Write the quadratic equation in standard form.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ x 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ x _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0
    In the equation above,

    a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , b _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , and c _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Substitute the values of a , b , and c into the quadratic formula.

    x b b 2a 2 4 a c

    x
    2 4

    2

    x

    8

    x

    8

    x 8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ and x 8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 88
    The approximate solutions of the equation are _ _ _ _ _ _ _ and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    4 x 2 8 x 1 0
    In the equation above, a 4, b 8, and c 1.

    x b b 2 4 ac 2 a

    x ( 8) ( 8) 2 4 4 1
    2 4

    x 8 64 16 8

    x 8 48 8

    x 8 8 48 1.87 and x 8 8 48 0.13
    The approximate solutions of the equation are 1.87 and 0.13.

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    126 127
    127 Page 128 129
    Objective 5
    127
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Do You Apply the Laws of Exponents in Problem-Solving Situations?
    When simplifying an expression with exponents, there are several rules, known as the laws of exponents , which must be followed.

    When multiplying terms with like bases, add the exponents.
    x a x b x ( a b )
    Example: x 4 x 2 x ( 4 2) x 6
    ( x x x x ) ( x x ) xxxxxx x 6

    When dividing terms with like bases, subtract the exponents.
    x
    x

    a
    b x
    ( a b )

    Example: x x 8 3 x ( 8 3) x 5

    x
    xxxx
    x
    x
    x
    xxx x
    5

    Sometimes dividing variables with exponents produces negative exponents.

    Example: x x 3 5 x ( 3 5) x 2
    x
    x x x
    xxxx x
    1 2 x 2

    A term with a negative exponent is equal to the reciprocal of
    that term with a positive exponent.

    x a x 1 a

    Example: x 5 x 1 5
    When raising a term with an exponent to a power, multiply the
    exponents.

    ( x a ) b x ab

    Example: ( x 2 ) 7 x 2 7 x 14
    ( x 2 ) 7 ( xx ) ( xx ) ( xx ) ( xx ) ( xx ) ( xx ) ( xx )
    ( x 2 ) 7 ( xxxxxxxxxxxxxx )
    ( x 2 ) 7 x 14

    Any base other than zero raised to the zero power equals one.

    x 0 1
    Example: 8 0 1

    All variables have an exponent. When an
    exponent is not given, it is understood to be 1.

    x = x 1 128
    128 Page 129 130
    Try It Simplify the expression 4 x 3 2 x 4 .
    4 x 3 2 x 4 4 x 3 2 x 4
    ( 4 2) ( x 3 x 4 )

    8 x ( )
    8 x
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    4 x 3 2 x 4 4 x 3 2 x 4
    ( 4 2) ( x 3 x 4 )
    8 x ( 3 4)
    8 x 7
    8 x 7

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 5

    128
    Try It Simplify the expression ( 5 a 3 b 2 ) 2 .
    ( 5 a 3 b 2 ) 2 5 2 ( a 3 ) ( b 2 )
    25 a b
    25 a b
    25 ab

    ( 5 a 3 b 2 ) 2 5 2 ( a 3 ) 2 ( b 2 ) 2
    25 a ( 3 2) b ( 2 2)
    25 a 6 b 4
    25 a 6 b 4

    ( ) ( ) 129
    129 Page 130 131
    Objective 5
    129
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Simplify the following expression: . Simplify the exponents in an expression raised to a power by multiplying the exponents. Each term in the parentheses is raised to the power of three, so the
    rule must be applied to each of the variables.
    ( x 7 xy 5 yz z 3 ) 3 ( ( x 7 x) ) 3 3 ( ( y 5 y) ) 3 3 ( ( z 3 z) ) 3 3 x x 3 21 y y 15 3 z z 3 9 Next divide the like variables with exponents by subtracting the exponents. This rule can be used only if the bases are the same.

    x
    x
    3

    21
    y
    y
    15 3
    z
    z
    3 9 x
    x
    3

    21
    y y
    3

    15
    z

    z

    9
    3

    x ( 21 3) ) y ( 3 15) ) z ( 9 3) )
    x 18 y 12 z 6
    Write the expression using only positive exponents.

    x 18 y 12 z 6 x y 18 12 z 6

    Do you see that . . .

    ( x 7 xy 5 yz z 3 ) 3

    Try It Find the area of a triangle with base 3 x 2 y 2 and height 2 x 4 y 3 .
    Substitute the given expressions for base and height into the
    formula for the area of a triangle, A 1 2 bh .

    A 1 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Simplify the expression.

    A ( 1 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) ( x x ) ( y y )

    A 1 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ( x ) ( y )
    A 3 xy
    A
    1 2 3 x 2 y 2 2 x 4 y 3
    A ( 1 2 3 2) ( x 2 x 4 ) ( y 2 y 3 )
    A 1 2 6 ( x 2 4 ) ( y 2 3 )
    A 3 x 6 y 5

    Now practice what you ve learned. 130
    130 Page 131 132
    Question 46
    If the coef cient of x 2 in the function y 2 x 2 is multiplied by 2, how is the graph of y 2 x 2

    affected?
    A The graph is translated up 2 units.
    B The graph is translated down 2 units.
    C The graph becomes narrower.
    D The graph becomes wider.

    Question 47
    How does the graph of the quadratic function
    y 1 2 x 2 compare to the graph of the quadratic
    function y 1 2 x 2 ?

    A The graph of y 1 2 x 2 is the graph of
    y 1 2 x 2 re ected across the y -axis.

    B The graph of y 1 2 x 2 is the graph of
    y 1 2 x 2 re ected across the x -axis.

    C The graph of y 1 2 x 2 is wider than the
    graph of y 1 2 x 2 .

    D The graph of y 1 2 x 2 is narrower than
    the graph of y 1 2 x 2 .

    Question 48
    How does the graph of y x 2 1 differ from the graph of y x 2 6?

    A The vertex of y x 2 1 is 1 unit below the vertex of y x 2 6.
    B The vertex of y x 2 6 is 6 units above the vertex of y x 2 1.
    C The vertex of y x 2 1 is 5 units below the vertex of y x 2 6.
    D The vertex of y x 2 6 is 7 units above the vertex of y x 2 1.

    Objective 5

    130
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Answer Key: page 232

    Answer Key: page 233 Answer Key: page 232 131
    131 Page 132 133
    Question 49
    A researcher collected data on pro ts resulting from different selling prices for a new mouthwash. She found that the curve that best t the points on her scatterplot was the parabola shown below.

    Which of the following is a correct interpretation of the researcher s graph?
    A As the selling price increases, the pro ts increase.
    B As the selling price increases, the pro ts decrease.
    C The selling price that results in the greatest pro t is the highest possible selling price.
    D A selling price that is neither too high nor too low is best for pro ts.

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    1 2 3 4 5 6 78

    y
    x
    Selling Price
    ( dollars)

    Pro t
    ( dollars)

    Objective 5

    131
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 233 132
    132 Page 133 134
    Objective 5
    132
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 50
    A stone is dropped from a height of 500 feet above the ground. The graph shows the stone s distance from the ground at different times.

    Which of the following is a correct interpretation of the graph?
    A The stone lands about 5 feet from where it was dropped.
    B The graph is a picture of the path of the stone as it falls.
    C The stone hits the ground between 5 seconds and 6 seconds after it is dropped.
    D The stone s distance from the ground decreases at a constant rate until the stone hits the ground.

    0
    100
    200

    1 23

    300
    400
    500
    600

    4 56

    h
    t
    Time
    ( seconds)

    Height
    ( feet)

    Answer Key: page 233 133
    133 Page 134 135
    Objective 5
    133
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 51 The table below lists ordered pairs from a quadratic function.

    What are the roots of the function?
    A 1 and 3
    B 0 and 4
    C 1 and 4
    D 4 and 1

    Question 52
    Find the solution set to the quadratic equation below.

    2 x 2 3 x 9
    A { 3 2 , 3}
    B { 2, 3}
    C { 2, 3}
    D { 3 2 , 3}

    Question 53
    Which of the following quadratic equations has the solutions 1 and 5?

    A x 2 4 x 5 0
    B x 2 4 x 1 0
    C x 2 4 x 1 0
    D x 2 4 x 5 0

    xy
    15
    00
    1 3
    2 4
    3 3
    40
    55

    Answer Key: page 233 Answer Key: page 233

    Answer Key: page 233 134
    134 Page 135 136
    Objective 5
    134
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 54
    For the quadratic equation x 2 4 x 2 0, the smaller root is between which 2 integers?

    A 0 and 1
    B 1 and 0
    C 1 and 2
    D 2 and 1

    Question 55
    The volume, V , of a sphere can be found using the following formula:

    V 4 3 r 3
    Which expression describes the volume of a sphere with radius 3 x 2 y ?

    A 12 x 5 y 3
    B 36 x 5 y 3
    C 12 x 6 y 3
    D 36 x 6 y 3

    Answer Key: page 234 Answer Key: page 234 135
    135 Page 136 137
    The student will demonstrate an understanding of geometric relationships and
    spatial reasoning.

    Objective 6

    For this objective you should be able to
    use transformational geometry to develop spatial sense; and

    use geometry to model and describe the physical world.

    How Do You Locate and Name Points on a Coordinate Plane?
    A coordinate grid is used to locate and name points on a plane. A coordinate grid is formed by two perpendicular number lines.

    The x -axis and y -axis divide the coordinate plane into four regions, called quadrants . The quadrants are usually referred to by the Roman
    Numerals I, II, III, and IV.

    y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    positive x -coordinate positive y -coordinate
    ( + , + )

    ( 2, 4)

    ( 3, 5)
    ( 4, 1)
    ( 5, 1)

    Quadrant I Quadrant II

    Quadrant IV Quadrant III
    positive x -coordinate negative y -coordinate
    ( + , ) negative x -coordinate negative y -coordinate
    ( , )

    negative x -coordinate positive y -coordinate
    ( , + )

    y
    x
    Origin
    ( 0, 0)

    ( x , y ) x -axis
    y -coordinate

    y -axis x -coordinate
    Ordered
    pair

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    135 136
    136 Page 137 138
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 6

    136
    Which of the points on the coordinate grid below satis es the
    conditions x 2 11 and y 5 2 ?

    Draw a vertical line through x
    2

    11 . All the points to the right

    of this line have an x -coordinate greater than 2 11 .
    Draw a horizontal line through y 5
    2 . All the points below

    this line have a y -coordinate less than 5 2 .

    Only point B , with the coordinates ( 7, 3) , satis es both conditions.
    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    A

    B

    C
    D

    x = 11 2

    y = 5 2

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    A

    B

    C
    D
    137
    137 Page 138 139
    Objective 6
    137
    How Do You Find the Midpoint of a Line Segment?
    The midpoint of a line segment is the point that lies halfway between the segment s endpoints and divides it into two congruent parts. You

    can nd the coordinates of the midpoint of a segment if you know the coordinates of its endpoints. Since the midpoint is halfway between the
    endpoints, its coordinates are the average of the coordinates of the endpoints.

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Find the midpoint of A B .

    To nd the x -coordinate of the midpoint, nd the x -value that is
    halfway between 2 and 6.

    ( 2 6) 2 4
    The x -coordinate of the midpoint is 4.
    To nd the y -coordinate of the midpoint, nd the y -value that is
    halfway between 7 and 3.

    ( 7 3) 2 5
    The y -coordinate of the midpoint is 5.
    The midpoint of A B is ( 4, 5) .

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    A ( 2, 7)
    Midpoint

    B ( 6, 3) 138
    138 Page 139 140
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 6

    138
    Midpoint Formula
    For any two points ( x 1, y 1) and ( x 2, y 2) , the coordinates of the midpoint of the line segment they determine are given by the

    formula below.
    M ( x 1 2 x 2 , y 1 2 y 2 )

    You can also nd the midpoint of a line segment by using the following formula.

    y
    x
    0
    ( x 1 , y 1 )
    x 1 + x 2

    ( x 2 , y 2 )
    2
    y 1 + y 2
    2
    , 139
    139 Page 140 141
    Objective 6
    139
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Use the midpoint formula to nd the midpoint, M , of R RS with endpoints R ( 3, 2) and S ( 1, 4) . Replace the variables in the midpoint formula with values from the coordinates of the two given points. R ( 3, 2) : x 1 3 and y 1 2
    S ( 1, 4) : x 2 1 and y 2 4
    M ( x 1 2 x 2 , y 1 2 y 2 )
    M ( 3 2 1 , 2 2 ( 4) )
    The coordinates of the midpoint are the average of the x -and y -coordinates.

    M ( 4 2 , 2 2 )
    M ( 2, 1)
    The midpoint of R S is the point M ( 2, 1) . Notice that point M lies on the segment connecting point R and point S and divides the

    segment into two congruent parts. y

    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34
    R ( 3, 2)

    M ( 2, 1)
    S ( 1, 4)

    Do you see that . . . 140
    140 Page 141 142
    Objective 6
    140
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    If  is translated 6 units to the right and 2 units up, what are the coordinates of the vertices of the translated triangle A B C ?
    The vertices of  are A ( 0, 0) , B ( 3, 1) , and C ( 5, 4) .
    If the triangle is translated 6 units to the right, then 6 must be added to the x -coordinate of each vertex. If the triangle is

    translated 2 units up, then 2 must be added to the y -coordinate of each vertex.

    The vertices of the translated gure are A ( 6, 2) , B ( 9, 3) , and C ( 11, 6) .
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1 2 3 4 5 67891011

    y
    x A B
    C
    A ' B '

    C '

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1 2 3 4 5 67891011

    y
    x A B
    C

    How Can You Show Transformations on a Coordinate Plane?
    Translations, re ections, and dilations can all be modeled on a coordinate plane. A gure has been translated or re ected if it has been

    moved without changing its shape or size. A gure has been dilated if its size has been changed proportionally.

    Translations
    A translation of a gure is a movement of the gure along a line. It can be described by stating how many units to the left or right the gure is

    moved and how many units up or down it is moved. A gure and its translated image are always congruent.

    Another transformation that can be modeled on
    a coordinate plane is a rotation.

    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 12345 141
    141 Page 142 143
    Objective 6
    141
    Re ections
    A re ection of a gure is the mirror image of the gure across a line. The line is called the line of re ection . The new gure is a re ection of

    the original gure, with the line of re ection serving as the mirror. A gure and its re ected image are always congruent.

    Each point of the re ected image is the same distance from the line of re ection as the corresponding point of the original gure, but on the
    opposite side of the line of re ection.

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    If the point ( 3, 4) is re ected across the x -axis, what will be the coordinates of its re ection?

    The x -coordinate of the point will be unchanged because the
    point is being re ected across the x -axis. The re ected point will have an x -coordinate of 3.

    The y -coordinate of the point is 4 units above the x -axis, so the
    y -coordinate of the re ected point will be 4 units below the x -axis. The re ected point will have a y -coordinate of 4.

    The coordinates of the re ected point will be ( 3, 4) . The point ( 3, 4) and its image ( 3, 4) are equally distant from the line of
    re ection, the x -axis.

    y
    x
    5
    3
    4

    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
    ( 3, 4)

    ( 3, 4)
    Line of reflection 142
    142 Page 143 144
    Objective 6
    142
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    If  is re ected across the y -axis, what are the coordinates of its re ection,  T ?

    The vertices of  are R ( 0, 2) , S ( 3, 5) , and T ( 1, 6) .
    Point R is on the y -axis, so it is a common vertex for the
    triangles.

    Point S is 3 units to the right of the y -axis, so S is 3 units to the
    left of the y -axis. The coordinates of S are ( 3, 5) .

    Point T is 1 unit to the right of the y -axis, so T is 1 unit to the
    left of the y -axis. The coordinates of T are ( 1, 6) .

    The vertices of  T are R ( 0, 2) , S ( 3, 5) , and T ( 1, 6) .

    y
    x
    1

    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34
    R

    S
    T
    S '
    T '

    Dilations
    A dilation is a proportional enlargement or reduction of a gure through a point called the center of dilation. The size of the

    enlargement or reduction is called the scale factor of the dilation.
    If the dilated image is larger than the original gure, then the
    scale factor 1. This is called an enlargement .

    If the dilated image is smaller than the original gure, then the
    scale factor 1. This is called a reduction .

    A gure and its dilated image are always similar. 143
    143 Page 144 145
    Objective 6
    143
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    What scale factor was used to transform quadrilateral RSTV to quadrilateral R S T V ?

    To nd the scale factor, compare the lengths of a pair of corresponding sides.
    Of the line segments that make up the quadrilaterals, the ones
    whose lengths are easiest to nd are R S and R S , because they are horizontal.

    The length of R S is the difference between the x -coordinates of
    points R and S .

    RS 3 1 2
    The length of R S is the difference between the x -coordinates of
    points R and S .

    R S 5 2 3
    You can tell from the graph that the gure has been enlarged, so
    the scale factor is greater than 1. Use this fact to be certain you state the ratio correctly.

    The scale factor is the ratio of their lengths.
    R S
    RS
    3
    2 1.5
    The scale factor used to dilate quadrilateral RSTV to quadrilateral R S T V is 1.5. Each side of the dilated quadrilateral is 1.5 times

    the length of the corresponding side of the original quadrilateral.

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    V
    RS

    T
    R '

    T '
    S '
    V '
    144
    144 Page 145 146
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 6

    144
    Another way to view a dilation is as a projection through a center of dilation.
    Looking at a dilation in this way can help you see it as an enlargement or a reduction.  has been dilated to form  .
    y
    x
    C B
    T S

    Center of dilation

    R
    A
    145
    145 Page 146 147
    Objective 6
    145
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS  was dilated to form  with ( 0, 0) as the center of dilation. What scale factor was used to dilate  ?

    To nd the scale factor, compare the lengths of a pair of corresponding sides of the two triangles.
    Use the lengths of C D and L M to nd the scale factor, since both
    segments are horizontal.

    The length of C D is the difference between the x -coordinates of
    points C and D .

    CD 0 ( 2) 2
    The length of L M is the difference between the x -coordinates of
    points L and M .

    LM 0 ( 6) 6
    From the graph you can tell that  has been reduced, so
    the scale factor is less than 1. Use this fact to be certain you state the ratio correctly.

    The scale factor is the ratio of their lengths.
    LM
    CD
    2
    6
    1
    3
    The scale factor used to dilate  to  is 1 3 . Each side of

    the dilated triangle is 1 3 the length of the corresponding side of the
    original triangle.

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    E

    C D

    N

    L M 146
    146 Page 147 148
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 6

    146
    Try It  has vertices S ( 0, 1) , T ( 1, 4) , and U ( 3, 5) . Find the
    coordinates of the vertices of its re ection across the x -axis.

    Because this is a re ection across the x -axis, the _ _ _ _ _ -coordinates do not change.
    The vertex S ( 0, 1) is 1 unit _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ the x -axis.
    S' must be 1 unit _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ the x -axis.
    The coordinates of S' are( _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ ) .

    The vertex T ( 1, 4) is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units above the x -axis.
    T must be 4 units _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ the x -axis.
    The coordinates of T are( _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ ) .

    The vertex U ( 3, 5) is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units above the x -axis.
    U must be 5 units _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ the x -axis.
    The coordinates of U are( _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ _ _ ) .

    Because this is a re ection across the x -axis, the x -coordinates do not
    change. The vertex S ( 0, 1) is 1 unit below the x -axis. S must be 1 unit
    above the x -axis. The coordinates of S are ( 0, 1) . The vertex T ( 1, 4) is
    4 units above the x -axis. T must be 4 units below the x -axis. The
    coordinates of T are ( 1, 4) . The vertex U ( 3, 5) is 5 units above the
    x -axis. U must be 5 units below the x -axis. The coordinates of U are ( 3, 5) .

    y
    x
    5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 345
    S

    T
    U

    Now practice what you ve learned. 147
    147 Page 148 149
    Objective 6
    147
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 56 The triangle in the graph below will be dilated by a scale factor of 2, using the point ( 0, 0) as the center of dilation.

    Which graph shows this dilation?

    y
    x
    3
    5

    2
    4

    1
    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 1 2 3456
    A '

    B '
    C '

    y
    x
    3
    5

    2
    4

    1
    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 1 2 3456
    A '

    B '
    C '

    y
    x
    3
    5

    2
    4

    1
    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 1 2 3456

    A '

    B '
    C '

    y
    x
    3
    5

    2
    4

    1
    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 1 2 3456
    A '

    B '

    C '

    y
    x
    3
    5

    2
    4

    1
    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 1 2 3456
    A

    B
    C

    Answer Key: page 234
    A
    B
    C
    D
    148
    148 Page 149 150
    Objective 6
    148
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 57
    Rectangle R S T V is a dilation of rectangle RSTV . What is the scale factor of the dilation?

    A 1 3
    B 1 2
    C 2
    D 3

    Question 58
    A triangle has side lengths 1, 1.5, and 2 units. Which of the following could be the lengths of

    the sides of a triangle that was formed by dilating the given triangle?

    A 1, 3, and 4 units
    B 2, 4, and 6 units
    C 4, 4.5, and 5 units
    D 4, 6, and 8 units

    Question 59
    Which of the following sets of points would be three of the vertices of the pentagon below

    re ected across the y -axis?

    A ( 5, 6) , ( 4, 1) , ( 3, 5)
    B ( 5, 6) , ( 4, 1) , ( 3, 5)
    C ( 6, 5) , ( 1, 4) , ( 5, 3)
    D ( 5, 6) , ( 4, 1) , ( 3, 5)

    Question 60
    The quadrilateral with vertices R ( 1, 1) , S ( 1, 4) , T ( 5, 8) , and V ( 7, 2) is translated 2 units to the

    right and 3 units down. Which of the following are the coordinates of two of the vertices of the
    translated quadrilateral?
    A ( 3, 4) , ( 7, 5)
    B ( 1, 2) , ( 3, 5)
    C ( 7, 11) , ( 3, 4)
    D ( 3, 2) , ( 7, 5)

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6

    y
    x
    3
    2

    4

    1
    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 1 2 3456
    R

    V
    S
    T
    R ' S '
    V ' T '

    Answer Key: page 234

    Answer Key: page 234

    Answer Key: page 235
    Answer Key: page 235 149
    149 Page 150 151
    Objective 6
    149
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 61 Triangle LMN is dilated by a scale factor of 2 with ( 0, 0) as the center of dilation. What will be the coordinates of L , M , and N of the dilated triangle?

    A L ( 5, 7) , M ( 5, 10) , and N ( 11, 7)
    B L ( 3, 8) , M ( 3, 12) , and N ( 6, 6)
    C L ( 6, 8) , M ( 6, 12) , and N ( 12, 6)
    D L ( 5, 6) , M ( 5, 8) , and N ( 8, 6)

    Question 62
    The endpoints of R S are R ( 3, 7) and S ( 3, 5) . What are the coordinates of the

    midpoint of R S ?

    A ( 6, 2)
    B ( 6, 12)
    C ( 0, 12)
    D ( 0, 6)

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9
    10

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
    L
    M

    N

    y

    x 0 1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    12
    13
    14

    1 2 34567891011121314
    Answer Key: page 235 Answer Key: page 235 150
    150 Page 151 152
    Objective 6
    150
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 63
    For which of the points on the graph is 7

    2 x 3 2 ?

    A Point R
    B Point S
    C Point T
    D Point U

    Question 64
    The coordinates of a given point are ( m , 2 n ) . What are the coordinates of the point when it is

    translated 2 units to the right?
    A ( m 2, 2 n 2)
    B ( m , 2 n 2)
    C ( 2 m , 4 n )
    D ( m 2, 2 n )

    Question 65
    Which point best represents ( 8 3 , 9 5 ) ?

    A Point L
    B Point M
    C Point N
    D Point P

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3
    4

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34
    L

    P

    M
    N

    y
    x
    3
    2
    1

    1
    2
    3

    0 1 2 3 4 1 2 34
    R
    S

    T
    U

    Answer Key: page 235

    Answer Key: page 236 Answer Key: page 236 151
    151 Page 152 153
    The student will demonstrate an understanding of two-and three-dimensional
    representations of geometric relationships and shapes.

    Objective 7 MAT
    H
    E

    MAT I CS

    151
    For this objective you should be able to use geometry to model and describe the physical world.
    How Do You Recognize a Solid from Different Perspectives?
    Given a drawing of a three-dimensional gure, a solid, you should be able to recognize other drawings that represent the same gure from a

    different perspective.
    A three-dimensional gure can be represented by drawing the gure from three different views: front, top, and side.

    To r ecognize the solid from different perspectives, you must visualize what the solid would look like if you were seeing it from the front,
    from above, or from one side.

    The solid below is made up of many small cubes. Can you visualize what it would look like from the front, from above, and
    from a side?

    These are the front, top, and side views of this solid.
    Front Top Right Side Left Side

    Front
    Side 152
    152 Page 153 154
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 7

    152
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Joan is making a tablecloth with a lace border. The tablecloth fabric costs $ 4.25 per square yard. The lace border costs $ 0.35 per foot.
    What is the approximate total cost of the fabric and lace border for a rectangular tablecloth that is 3 feet wide and 5 feet long?

    To answer this question, you need to know the area of the tablecloth to nd the cost of the fabric, and you need to know its
    perimeter to nd the cost of the lace border.
    Use the formula for the area of a rectangle. The dimensions are
    given in feet.

    A lw
    A
    5 3 15 ft 2
    The area of the tablecloth is 15 square feet. You want to know the area in square yards.

    15 ft 2 9 ft 2 per yd 2 1.67 yd 2
    Joan needs about 1.67 square yards of fabric.
    Fabric costs $ 4.25 per square yard.

    1.67 yd 2 $ 4.25 per yd 2 $ 7.10 for fabric
    Use the perimeter formula to nd the perimeter of the
    tablecloth.

    P 2( l w )
    P 2( 5 3) 16 ft
    The perimeter of the tablecloth is 16 feet.
    Lace border costs $ 0.35 per foot.

    16 ft $ 0.35 per ft $ 5.60 for lace border
    The approximate cost of these materials is $ 7.10 $ 5.60 $ 12.70.

    Since 1 yard  3 feet, a square yard is 3 feet
    on each side.

    There are 9 square feet in 1 square yard.
    To convert square feet to square yards, divide
    the number of square feet by 9.

    1 ft 1 ft 1 ft
    1 yd

    1 ft
    1 ft
    1 ft
    1 yd

    What Kinds of Problems Can You Solve with Geometry?
    The laws of geometry govern the physical world around us. You can solve many types of problems using geometry, including problems

    involving these geometric concepts:
    the area or perimeter of gures;

    the measures of the sides or angles of polygons;
    the surface area and volume of solid gures;
    the ratios of the sides of similar gures; and
    the relationship between the sides of a right triangle. 153
    153 Page 154 155
    Objective 7
    153
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A jewelry designer is working with a design that is a regular pentagon inscribed in a circle. He needs to cut a small stone to t into each of the triangles shown below. What is the measure of the angle indicated?

    Think about what you know.
    The angles at the center of a pentagon have a sum of 360 ° , and they are congruent because the pentagon is a regular 5-sided

    polygon.
    Use what you know to write an equation. Let x represent the
    measure of the angle.

    x 360 5
    x 72
    The measure of the angle indicated is 72 ° .

    An architect is constructing a scale model of a building with a rectangular base. The actual building will be 300 feet tall, but the
    scale model is 18 inches tall. The dimensions of the building s base are 200 feet by 150 feet. What are the dimensions of the base of the
    scale model?
    Use a proportion to nd each of the dimensions of the base of the scale model.

    Length Width
    18
    300
    l
    200
    18
    300
    w
    150

    300 l 18 200 300 w 18 150

    300 l 3600 300 w 2700
    l 12 in. w 9 in.

    The dimensions of the model s base are 12 inches by 9 inches. 154
    154 Page 155 156
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 7

    154
    Try It The dining area of a restaurant includes a patio 25 feet wide by
    40 feet long. On an architect s scale drawing of the restaurant, the width of the patio is 5 inches. What is the length of the patio in
    the scale drawing?
    Use a proportion to nd the length of the patio in the scale drawing.
    Find the ratios of corresponding measurements.

    Width: Length:

    Write a proportion and solve it.

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ l 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    25 l _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    l _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    The length of the patio in the scale drawing is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ inches.

    Width: 5 25 Length: l 40
    5
    25
    l
    40

    25 l 5 40
    25 l 200
    l 8

    The length of the patio in the scale drawing is 8 inches.

    5 l
    l
    40
    5 155
    155 Page 156 157
    Objective 7
    155
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    What Is the Pythagorean Theorem?
    The Pythagorean Theorem is a relationship among the lengths of the sides of a right triangle. This special relationship applies only to right

    triangles.
    The sides of a right triangle have special names.
    The hypotenuse of a right triangle is the longest side of the
    triangle. The hypotenuse is always opposite the right angle in the triangle. In the diagram below, the length of the hypotenuse

    is represented by c .
    The legs of the right triangle are the two sides that form the
    right angle. In the diagram below, the lengths of the legs are represented by a and b .

    The Pythagorean Theorem can be stated algebraically or verbally.
    Algebraic Verbal
    In any right triangle with legs In any right triangle the sum of a and b and hypotenuse c , the squares of the lengths of the

    a 2 b 2 c 2 . legs is equal to the square of the length of the hypotenuse.

    The Pythagorean Theorem can also be interpreted with a geometric model.

    a 2
    b 2

    c 2
    a 2 b 2 c 2 + =

    c a
    b
    Leg

    Hypotenuse

    Leg

    Geometric 156
    156 Page 157 158
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 7

    156
    Does the model below demonstrate the Pythagorean Theorem?
    A triangle is a right triangle if its sides satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem. A geometric model of the Pythagorean Theorem uses
    squares, not rectangles, to show that the sum of the areas formed by the legs is equal to the area formed by the hypotenuse. The model
    above does not demonstrate the Pythagorean Theorem.
    Look at another model.

    The square formed by the hypotenuse is 10 10 units. It has an area of 10 10 100 square units.
    The square formed by one leg is 6 6 units. It has an area of 6 6 36 square units.
    The square formed by the other leg is 8 8 units. It has an area of 8 8 64 square units.
    Since 100 36 64, the area of the square formed by the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the areas of the two squares
    formed by the legs.
    The second model does show that the sides of the triangle satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem, a 2 b 2 c 2 . The sides form a right

    triangle. 157
    157 Page 158 159
    Objective 7
    157
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It The model below shows how three squares could be joined to form a triangle. Do the squares form a right triangle?

    The longest side is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units long, so it is the hypotenuse.
    The legs are _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units and _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units long.
    The square formed by the hypotenuse is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units.
    It has an area of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.
    The square formed by the shorter leg is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units.
    It has an area of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.
    The square formed by the longer leg is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ units.
    It has an area of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.
    Since _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , the area of the square formed by the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the areas of the two

    squares formed by the legs.
    Yes, the squares form a right triangle.

    The longest side is 13 units long, so it is the hypotenuse. The legs are
    5 units and 12 units long. The square formed by the hypotenuse is 13 by
    13 units. It has an area of 13 13 169 square units. The square formed
    by the shorter leg is 5 by 5 units. It has an area of 5 5 25 square units.
    The square formed by the longer leg is 12 by 12 units. It has an area of
    12 12 144 square units. Since 169 25 144, the area of the square
    formed by the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the areas of the two
    squares formed by the legs. Yes, the squares form a right triangle.

    Now practice what you ve learned. 158
    158 Page 159 160
    Objective 7
    158
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 66
    The object below is built from blocks.

    Which is not a top, front, or side view of the object?
    AC

    BD

    Front
    Side

    Answer Key: page 236 159
    159 Page 160 161
    Objective 7
    159
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 67 Look at the drawing of the solid below.

    Which represents the top view of this solid?
    AC

    BD

    Front
    Side

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 236
    Question 68
    An interior decorator painted two rectangular panels. One panel is 10 feet by 20 feet, and the other is 4 feet by 15 feet. The can of paint she used covers at most 400 square feet. She then used all the paint

    that remained in the can to completely paint a third rectangular panel. Which of the following is a reasonable estimate of the dimensions of the third panel?

    A 12 ft by 20 ft
    B 15 ft by 15 ft
    C 10 ft by 16 ft
    D 10 ft by 12 ft

    Answer Key: page 236 160
    160 Page 161 162
    Objective 7
    160
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 69
    Each set of squares below can be joined at their vertices to form a triangle. Which set of squares

    could not be used to form the sides of a right triangle?

    A

    B
    C
    D

    Question 70
    An archaeologist is making a scale drawing of the foundation of an ancient building. The

    foundation is a rectangle that measures 18 feet by 45 feet. If the shorter dimension of the
    drawing is 4 inches, what is the longer dimension in inches?

    Record your answer and ll in the bubbles. Be sure to use the correct place value.

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    40 in.
    9 in.

    41 in.

    15 in.
    8 in. 16 in.

    10 in.
    24 in. 26 in.

    3 in.
    4 in.
    5 in.

    Answer Key: page 236 Answer Key: page 236 161
    161 Page 162 163
    Objective 7
    161
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 71 Ed is installing a new bathroom sink countertop. The rectangular countertop is 5 feet 4 inches long by 2 feet 2 inches wide. He plans to tile the countertop with square tiles that are 2 inches on
    each side. The circular sink has a diameter of 16 inches.

    What is the minimum number of tiles Ed will need to cover the countertop area, not including
    the sink?
    A 732
    B 366
    C 410
    D 404

    Question 72
    Which model below uses the Pythagorean Theorem to show that the triangle is a right

    triangle?

    A

    B
    C
    D

    Answer Key: page 237 Answer Key: page 237 162
    162 Page 163 164
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    For this objective you should be able to
    use procedures to determine measures of solids;

    use indirect measurement to solve problems; and
    describe how changes in dimensions affect linear, area, and
    volume measurements.

    How Do You Find the Surface Area of Solids?
    You can use models or formulas to nd the surface area of prisms, cylinders, and other solids.

    A prism is a solid gure with two bases. The bases are congruent
    polygons. The other faces of the prism are rectangles. The prism is named by the shape of its bases. For example, a triangular

    prism has two triangles as its bases.

    A cylinder is a solid gure with two congruent circular bases
    and a curved surface.

    Curved surface
    Base

    Cylinder
    Base

    Face
    Base

    Triangular Prism

    162

    The student will demonstrate an understanding of the concepts and uses of
    measurement and similarity.

    Objective 8 163
    163 Page 164 165
    Objective 8
    163
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Like the area of a plane gure, the surface area of a solid gure is measured in square units.
    The total surface area of a solid gure is equal to the sum of the
    areas of all its surfaces.

    The lateral surface area of a solid gure is equal to the sum of
    the areas of all its faces and curved surfaces. It does not include the area of the gure s bases.

    One way to nd the surface area of a solid gure is to use a net of the gure. A net of a 3-dimensional gure is a 2-dimensional drawing that
    shows what the gure would look like when opened up and unfolded with all its surfaces laid out at. Use the net to nd the area of each
    surface.

    You can also nd the surface area of a solid gure by using a formula. Substitute the appropriate dimensions of the gure into the formula
    and calculate its surface area. The formulas for total surface area and lateral surface area of several solid gures are included in the
    Mathematics Chart.

    The curved surface of a cylinder, when unfolded
    to form a net, is a rectangle. 164
    164 Page 165 166
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    164
    Find the lateral surface area and the total surface area of the cylinder shown below to the nearest tenth of a square centimeter.
    Use the formula for the lateral surface area of a cylinder, S 2 rh .
    The diameter of the cylinder shown on the diagram is

    3.2 centimeters. The radius, r , is 1 2 the diameter. Since 1

    2 3.2 1.6, the radius of the cylinder is 1.6 cm.
    The height, h , shown on the diagram is 6.4 centimeters.

    Substitute the values of r and h into the formula.

    S 2 rh
    S
    2( ) ( 1.6) ( 6.4)
    S 64.3398
    The lateral surface area is approximately 64.3 cm 2 .
    The formula for the total surface area of a cylinder is S 2
    rh 2 r 2 .

    The area of the lateral surface, 2 rh 64.3398 cm 2 , was found
    above.

    Find the area of the two circular bases.

    Substitute the value of the radius, r 1. 6, into the second part of the formula, 2
    r 2 .

    2 r 2 2( ) ( 1.6) 2 16.0850 cm 2
    To calculate the total surface area of the cylinder, add the lateral
    surface area and the area of the two bases.

    S 64.3398 16.0850 80.4248

    The total surface area of the cylinder is approximately 80.4 cm 2 .

    6.4 cm
    3.2 cm

    When a formula includes the value , you can use
    either the button on your calculator or the
    approximation for in the Mathematics Chart. 165
    165 Page 166 167
    Objective 8
    165
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A storage shed has rectangular sides and a roof in the shape of a half-cylinder. Both the sides and the roof of the shed are to be painted. The dimensions of the shed are shown below.

    Find the total area of the surfaces to be painted to the nearest square foot.
    Calculate the area of the rectangular sides of the storage shed.
    There are two sides with dimensions 6 ft by 8.5 ft. Each of these sides has an area of 6 8.5 51 ft 2 .

    There are two sides with dimensions 5 ft by 8.5 ft. Each of these sides has an area of 5 8.5 42.5 ft 2 .
    The four sides have a total area of 2( 51) 2( 42.5) 187 ft 2 .
    Calculate the surface area of the roof.
    The roof is a half-cylinder with radius 3 ft and height 5 ft. The formula for the surface area of a cylinder is S 2
    rh 2 r 2 . Substitute the values for r and h into the formula.

    S 2 rh 2 r 2 S 2
    3 5 2 3 2 S 30 18

    S 48 S 150.80 ft 2

    The area of the cylinder is about 150.80 ft 2 . Since the roof is only half a cylinder, divide the surface area by 2. The area of the
    roof is approximately 75.40 ft 2 .
    Add the area of the roof to the total area of the sides of the
    building to nd the total area to be painted.

    187 ft 2 75.40 ft 2 262.40 ft 2
    To the nearest square foot, the area to be painted is 262 ft 2 .

    8.5 ft
    6 ft 5 ft

    3 ft 166
    166 Page 167 168
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    166
    Try It The net of a triangular prism is shown on the coordinate grid below.
    The height of each triangle ( indicated by the dotted lines) is approximately 1.7 units. Use the grid to nd the other dimensions
    of the prism and its total surface area to the nearest square unit.
    The surface area of the prism is equal to the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the areas of all its faces.

    The total surface area of the triangular prism is
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.

    The surface area of the prism is equal to the sum of the areas of all its faces.

    The total surface area of the triangular prism is 3.4 48 51.4 square units.
    A 1 2 bh 1 2 2 1.7 1.7
    Each triangular face has an area
    of 1.7 square units. The prism has
    2 triangular faces. Since
    2 1.7 3.4, their combined area
    is 3.4 square units.

    A lw 8 2 16
    Each rectangular face has an
    area of 16 square units. The
    prism has 3 rectangular faces.
    Since 3 16 48, their combined
    area is 48 square units.

    Find the area of a triangular face.
    A 1 2 bh

    A 1 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Each triangular face has an area
    of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.
    The prism has _ _ _ _ _ _ _ triangular faces.

    Since 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,
    their combined area is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.

    Find the area of a rectangular face.
    A lw

    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Each rectangular face has an area
    of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units.
    The prism has _ _ _ _ _ _ _ rectangular faces.

    Since 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,
    their combined area is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square units. 167
    167 Page 168 169
    Objective 8
    167
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    What Is the Volume of a Solid?
    The volume of a solid is a measure of the space it occupies. Volume is measured in cubic units.

    You can use formulas or models to nd the volume of solid gures. The formulas for calculating the volume of several solid gures are in the
    Mathematics Chart.
    When using a formula to nd the volume of a solid, follow these guidelines:

    Identify the solid gure you are working with. This will help you
    select the correct volume formula.

    Use models to help visualize the solid and to assign the variables
    in the volume formula. A model can also be used to nd the dimensions of a gure.

    Substitute the appropriate dimensions of the gure for the
    corresponding variables in the volume formula.

    Calculate the volume. State your answer in cubic units.

    When nding the volume of a prism, cylinder,
    pyramid, or cone, it is important to remember
    that the height must be measured along a line
    perpendicular to the base of the gure not, for
    example, along a face of a pyramid.
    Height of
    the pyramid 168
    168 Page 169 170
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    168
    The net of a rectangular prism is shown below. Use the ruler provided on the Mathematics Chart to measure the dimensions
    of the gure to the nearest tenth of a centimeter. Use these dimensions to nd the volume of the rectangular prism.

    Use the formula for the volume of a prism, V Bh , in which B represents the area of the base of the prism and h represents the
    prism s height.
    Find the area of the base, B . The base is a rectangle, so its area
    is equal to its length times its width.

    Measure the length and width using the centimeter ruler. The length is 5.0 cm, and the width is 3.5 cm. Calculate the area of

    the base using A lw .
    B 5.0 3.5
    B 17.5 cm 2
    Measure the height of the prism: h 2.0 cm.

    Substitute the area of the base, B , and the height, h , into the
    formula for the volume of a prism, V Bh .

    V 17.5 2.0
    V 35 cm 3
    The prism has a volume of 35 cubic centimeters. 169
    169 Page 170 171
    Objective 8 MAT
    H
    E

    MAT I CS Try It Which solid has the greater volume: a cylinder 3 inches high with a radius of 2 inches or a cone of the same radius that is 8.5 inches high?

    The _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ has the greater volume.
    Cylinder
    The formula for the volume of a cylinder is V Bh . Find B ,

    the area of the base of the cylinder.

    The base of the cylinder is a
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Use the formula A r 2 .
    Substitute _ _ _ _ _ _ _ for r .
    A r 2
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    B _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 2
    Substitute 12.57 for B and
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ for h in the formula for
    the volume of a cylinder.
    V Bh

    V 12.57 _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    V _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    The volume of the cylinder is
    about _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cubic inches.

    Cone
    The formula for the volume
    of a cone is V 1 3 Bh . Find B ,
    the area of the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of
    the cone.
    The base of the cone is a
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Use the formula A r 2 .
    Substitute _ _ _ _ _ _ _ for r .
    A r 2
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    B _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 2
    Substitute 12.57 for B and
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ for h in the formula for
    the volume of a cone.
    V 1 3 Bh

    V 1 3 12.57 _ _ _ _ _ _
    V _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    The volume of the cone is
    about _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cubic inches.

    2 in.
    8.5 in.
    2 in.
    3 in.

    169 170
    170 Page 171 172
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    170
    How Can You Solve Problems Using the Pythagorean Theorem?
    The Pythagorean Theorem is a relationship among the lengths of the three sides of a right triangle. The

    Pythagorean Theorem applies only to right triangles.
    In any right triangle with leg lengths a and b
    and hypotenuse length c , a 2 b 2 c 2 .

    If the side lengths of any triangle satisfy the
    equation a 2 b 2 c 2 , then the triangle is a
    right triangle, and c is its hypotenuse.

    Any set of three whole numbers that satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem is called a Pythagorean triple . The set of numbers { 5, 12, 13} forms a

    Pythagorean triple because these numbers satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem. To show this, substitute 13 for c in the formula since 13
    is the greatest number and substitute 5 and 12 for a and b .
    a 2 b 2 c 2
    5 2 12 2 13 2
    25 144 169
    169 169
    A triangle with side lengths 5, 12, and 13 units is a right triangle.
    Any multiple of a Pythagorean triple is also a Pythagorean triple. Since the set of numbers { 5, 12, 13} is a Pythagorean triple, the triple formed

    by multiplying each number in the set by 2, { 10, 24, 26} , is also a Pythagorean triple. A triangle with side lengths 10, 24, and 26 units is
    also a right triangle.

    c
    a
    b
    A right triangle is a triangle with a right
    angle. The legs of a right triangle are the two sides
    that form the right angle. The hypotenuse of
    a right triangle is the longest side, the side
    opposite the right angle.

    Leg
    Hypotenuse
    Leg

    The cylinder has the greater volume.

    Cylinder
    The base of the cylinder is a circle.
    Substitute 2 for r .

    A r 2
    A 2 2
    A 12.57
    B 12.57 in. 2

    Substitute 12.57 for B and 3 for h
    in the formula for the volume of a
    cylinder.

    V Bh
    V
    12.57 3
    V 37.71
    The volume of the cylinder is
    about 37.71 cubic inches.

    Cone
    Find B , the area of the base of the
    cone. The base of the cone is a
    circle. Substitute 2 for r.

    A r 2
    A 2 2
    A 12.57
    B 12.57 in. 2

    Substitute 12.57 for B and 8.5 for h
    in the formula for the volume of a
    cone.

    V 1 3 Bh

    V 1 3 12.57 8.5
    V 35.615
    The volume of the cone is
    about 35.615 cubic inches. 171
    171 Page 172 173
    Objective 8
    171
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Would a triangle with side lengths 3 inches, 4 inches, and 5 inches form a right triangle? Determine whether the side lengths satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem. Since 5 is the greatest length, it would be the length of the triangle s hypotenuse. Substitute 5 for c in the formula.
    Substitute 3 and 4 for a and b , the two legs.
    a 2 b 2 c 2
    3 2 4 2  5 2
    9 16  25
    25 25

    Since the side lengths satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem, the triangle is a right triangle.

    This example also shows that the set { 3, 4, 5} forms a Pythagorean triple.

    A right triangle has a side length of 24 meters and a hypotenuse of 25 meters. Find the length of the third side.
    Substitute 25, the hypotenuse, for c and 24, the length of one side, for b .
    a 2 b 2 c 2
    a 2 24 2 25 2
    a 2 576 625
    576 576
    a 2 49
    a 49
    a 7
    The length of the third side is 7 meters. 172
    172 Page 173 174
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    172
    On a tour around a lake, visitors ride a tour bus 3 miles south and 5 miles east. Then they ride a boat across the lake back to the
    starting point. Their journey forms a right triangle.

    Approximately how many miles is the trip across the lake?
    The bus route and the boat route form a right triangle. The two parts of the journey traveled by bus form the legs of the right

    triangle. Their lengths are given as 3 miles and 5 miles. The boat s return path across the lake forms the hypotenuse, c .

    Use the Pythagorean Theorem to nd the length of the boat s path across the lake.
    Substitute 3 and 5 for the legs, a and b .
    a 2 b 2 c 2
    3 2 5 2 c 2
    9 25 c 2
    34 c 2
    34 c
    Find a decimal approximation of 34 .

    34 5.831
    Rounded to the nearest tenth, the trip across the lake is approximately 5.8 miles.

    5 miles Tour bus route
    Boat route
    3 miles

    Starting point 173
    173 Page 174 175
    Objective 8
    173
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    How Can You Use Proportional Relationships to Solve Problems?
    You can use proportional relationships to nd missing side lengths in similar gures. To solve problems that involve similar gures, follow

    these guidelines:
    Identify which gures are similar and
    which sides correspond. Similar gures have the same shape, but not

    necessarily the same size. The lengths of the corresponding sides of similar
    gures are proportional.
    Triangle ABC is similar to triangle RST.
     
    AB
    RS ST
    BC AC
    RT

    Write a proportion and solve it.

    Answer the question asked.

    The triangles in the drawing below are similar.

    Find the length of A C .
    Write a proportion comparing the ratio of the unknown
    side and its corresponding side to the ratio of a pair of corresponding sides whose lengths are known.

    AA C corresponds to D F . The length of A C is unknown; DF 7.5 ft.
    B C and E F are a pair of corresponding sides with known lengths; BC 4 ft, and EF 10 ft.

    BC
    EF
    AC
    DF

    Substitute the known values.

    4
    10 7.
    AC
    5

    Use cross products to solve.

    4( 7.5) 10 AC
    30 10 AC
    3 AC
    The length of A C is 3 feet.

    A
    B
    C DF

    E
    2 ft 4 ft
    10 ft

    7.5 ft

    One way to solve a proportion is to use
    cross products.
    x
    14
    3
    2

    2 x 3 14

    2 x 42
    x 21

    A C

    B

    R
    T

    S 174
    174 Page 175 176
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    174
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Try It Two regular hexagons are inscribed in circles. The smaller
    hexagon has a side length of 12 centimeters, and the larger one has a side length of 60 centimeters. If the radius of the larger
    circle is 52 centimeters, what is the radius of the smaller circle?
    Since the hexagons are similar gures, the ratios of the lengths of their corresponding sides will be proportional.

    Use cross products to solve.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ r 12 _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ r _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    r _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cm
    The radius of the smaller circle is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ centimeters.

    60
    12 r
    52

    60 r 12 52
    60 r 624
    r 10.4 cm
    The radius of the smaller circle is 10.4 centimeters.

    large
    small r 12

    How Is the Perimeter of a Figure Affected When Its Dimensions Are Changed Proportionally?
    When the dimensions of a gure are changed proportionally, the gure is dilated by a scale factor. The perimeter of the dilated gure will
    change by the same scale factor.
    To dilate a gure means to enlarge or reduce it by a given scale factor. For example, the quadrilateral on the left has been dilated ( enlarged)

    by a scale factor of 2.5 to form the quadrilateral on the right.

    The perimeter of the larger quadrilateral is 2.5 times the perimeter of the smaller quadrilateral.
    If the dimensions of two similar gures are in the ratio a b , then their
    perimeters will be in the ratio a b . Do you see that . . .

    See Objective 6,
    page 142, for more
    information about
    dilations. 175
    175 Page 176 177
    Objective 8
    175
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS In the drawing below, rectangle B is a dilation of rectangle A by a scale factor of 1.5.

    What effect should this dilation have on the perimeter of rectangle B?
    The perimeter of rectangle B should increase by the same factor, 1.5.
    To prove this, rst nd the perimeter of rectangle A.

    P 2( l w ) 2( 5 3) 2( 8) 16 units
    Use the scale factor to nd the perimeter of rectangle B.

    16 1.5 24

    Use the formula to nd the perimeter of rectangle B.
    The dimensions of rectangle B equal the dimensions of rectangle A multiplied by the scale factor, 1.5.

    Find the length and width of rectangle B.
    l 5 1.5 7.5
    w 3 1.5 4.5
    Find the perimeter.
    P 2( l w )
    P 2( 7.5 4.5)
    P 2( 12)
    P 24 units
    Compare the two perimeters.

    24
    16 1
    1. 5

    The perimeter of rectangle B increased by a factor of 1.5, the same factor by which its dimensions increased.

    5
    Rectangle A
    3
    Rectangle B

    The perimeter of
    rectangle A. . . . . . should equal the perimeter of
    rectangle B.

    . . . times the
    scale factor. . . 176
    176 Page 177 178
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    176
    How Is the Area of a Figure Affected When Its Dimensions Are Changed Proportionally?
    When the dimensions of a gure are changed proportionally, the gure is dilated by a scale factor. The area of the dilated gure will change by
    the square of the scale factor.
    If the dimensions of two similar gures are in the ratio a b , then their
    areas will be in the ratio ( a b ) 2 a b 2 2 .

    Try It The perimeter of a triangle is 24.8 meters. If the triangle is enlarged
    by a scale factor of 3.4, what will be the perimeter of the larger triangle?

    The perimeter of the triangle should increase by a scale factor
    of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    P larger P smaller _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Substitute the known values.
    P larger _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    P larger _ _ _ _ _ _ _ m
    The perimeter of the larger triangle will be _ _ _ _ _ _ _ meters.

    The perimeter of the triangle should increase by a scale factor of 3.4.
    P larger P smaller 3.4
    P larger 24.8 3.4
    P larger 84.32 m
    The perimeter of the larger triangle will be 84.32 meters.

    Do you see that . . . 177
    177 Page 178 179
    Objective 8
    177
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A 5-by-7-inch photograph is enlarged by a scale factor of 4. How is the area of the photograph affected? The area of the photograph should increase by the square of the scale factor: 4 2 16. The area should increase by a factor of 16. To prove this, rst nd the area of the original photograph.
    A lw
    A
    7 5
    A 35 in. 2
    Use the scale factor to nd the area of the enlarged photograph.

    35 ( 4 2 ) 35 16 560

    Use the formula to nd the area of the enlarged photo. The
    dimensions of the enlarged photo are the dimensions of the original photo multiplied by the scale factor, 4.

    Find the length and width of the enlarged photo.
    l 7 4 28
    w 5 4 20
    Find the area.
    A lw
    A
    28 20
    A 560 in. 2

    The ratio of the two areas is . When reduced, this ratio

    is , or ( 2 .
    The area of the enlarged photograph increased by a factor of 16.

    4
    1)
    16
    1

    560
    35

    The area of the
    original photo. . . . . . should equal the area of the
    enlarged photo.

    . . . times the square
    of the scale factor. . .

    Try It
    A certain bakery sells two sizes of round cakes. The radius of the
    small cake is 1 2 the radius of the large cake. If the top of the large
    cake has an area of 200 in. 2 , what is the area of the top of the
    small cake? 178
    178 Page 179 180
    How Is the Volume of a Figure Affected When Its Dimensions Are Changed Proportionally?
    When the dimensions of a gure are changed proportionally, the gure is dilated by a scale factor. The volume of the dilated gure will change
    by the cube of the scale factor.
    If the dimensions of two similar solid gures are in the ratio a b , then
    their volumes will be in the ratio ( a b ) 3 a b 3 3 .

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 8

    178
    The top of the small cake is a dilation of the top of the large cake
    by a scale factor of .

    The area of the dilated gure will change by the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the
    scale factor.
    The area of the top of the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cake is equal to the area of

    the top of the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cake multiplied by ( )
    2
    .

    The area of the top of the small cake can be calculated as follows.
    A 200 ( )
    2

    A 200
    A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 2
    The area of the top of the small cake is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ square inches.

    The top of the small cake is a dilation of the top of the large cake by a scale
    factor of 1 2 . The area of the dilated gure will change by the square of the
    scale factor. The area of the top of the small cake is equal to the area of
    the top of the large cake multiplied by ( 1 2 ) 2 .

    A 200 ( 1 2 ) 2

    A 200 1 4
    A 50 in. 2
    The area of the top of the small cake is 50 square inches.

    Do you see that . . . 179
    179 Page 180 181
    Objective 8
    179
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A rectangular prism with a volume of 60 cubic units is dilated by a scale factor of 3. What is the volume of the dilated prism? The volume of the original prism is 60 cubic units. Find the volume of the dilated prism.
    60 ( 3 3 ) 60 27 1620

    The volume of the dilated prism is 1620 cubic units.

    The volume of
    the original
    prism. . .

    . . . should equal
    the volume of
    the dilated prism.

    . . . times the cube of
    the scale factor. . .

    Try It A breakfast-cereal manufacturer is using a scale factor of 2.5 to
    increase the size of one of its cereal boxes. If the volume of the original cereal box was 240 in. 3 , what is the volume of the
    enlarged box?
    If the dimensions of the box are increased by a scale factor of _ _ _ _ _ ,
    then the volume of the box will increase by the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the
    scale factor.
    V _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 3
    V _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    V _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 3
    The volume of the enlarged box is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ cubic inches.

    If the dimensions of the box are increased by a scale factor of 2.5, then
    the volume of the box will increase by the cube of the scale factor.

    V 240 ( 2.5) 3
    V 240 15.625
    V 3750 in. 3
    The volume of the enlarged box is 3750 cubic inches.

    Now practice what you ve learned. 180
    180 Page 181 182
    Objective 8
    180
    Answer Key: page 237
    Answer Key: page 237
    Question 74
    The net of a triangular prism is shown below. Use the ruler on the Mathematics Chart to measure the dimensions of the prism to the nearest tenth of a centimeter.

    Which is closest to the total surface area of the prism?
    A 37 cm 2
    B 23 cm 2
    C 47 cm 2
    D 40 cm 2

    Question 73
    The net below can be folded to form a cylinder.

    What is the approximate total surface area of the cylinder?
    A 64 square meters
    B 83 square meters
    C 246 square meters
    D 286 square meters

    5 m
    2.8 m
    MAT

    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS 181
    181 Page 182 183
    Question 75
    Use the ruler on the Mathematics Chart to measure the dimensions of the gure to the

    nearest tenth of a centimeter.

    Which equation could be used to nd the volume of the gure in cubic centimeters?
    A V 1 3 ( 3.1) 2 ( 4) 1 3 ( 3.1) 2 ( 7.6)
    B V 1 3 ( 3.1) ( 7.6) 2 ( 3.1) ( 4) 2
    C V 1 3 ( 3.1) 2 ( 7.6) ( 3.1) 2 ( 4)
    D V ( 3.1) ( 7.6) 2 ( 3.1) ( 4) 2

    Question 76
    A pipe in the shape of a cylinder with a 30-inch diameter is to go through a passageway shaped

    like a rectangular prism. The passageway is 3 ft high, 4 ft wide, and 6 ft long. The space around
    the pipe is to be lled with insulating material.

    What is the volume, to the nearest cubic foot, of the space to be lled with insulating material?
    A 72 ft 3
    B 43 ft 3
    C 30 ft 3
    D 29 ft 3

    3 ft
    4 ft

    6 ft
    30 in.

    Objective 8

    181
    Answer Key: page 238 Answer Key: page 238

    MAT H E
    MAT I CS 182
    182 Page 183 184
    Question 77
    Jillian walks from the parking-lot entrance of a park to the scenic overlook by following a sidewalk

    along the edge of the park. She walks back to the parking lot by taking a shortcut through the park.
    The drawing below shows her journey.

    To the nearest foot, how much shorter was her trip back to the parking lot than her walk to the
    scenic overlook?
    A 417 ft
    B 213 ft
    C 562 ft
    D 261 ft

    Question 78
     and  are similar.

    What is the length of S T ?
    A 6.4 units
    B 7.75 units
    C 13.3 units
    D 8.75 units

    Question 79
    An art store sells two sizes of rectangular poster boards. The smaller poster board has a width of

    18 inches and a height of 24 inches. The larger poster board is similar to the smaller one and
    has a height of 28 inches. What is the width in inches of the larger poster board?

    Record your answer and ll in the bubbles. Be sure to use the correct place value.

    Question 80
    The ratio of the diameter of a larger circle to the
    diameter of a smaller circle is 3 2 . Which number
    represents the ratio of the area of the larger
    circle to the area of the smaller circle?

    A 3 2

    B 2 3
    C 4 9
    D 9 4

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    L
    M S
    NR T
    6
    810
    7 7.5

    Scenic
    overlook

    Parking-lot
    entrance

    Sidewalk
    300 ft

    Sidewalk
    475 ft

    Shortcut

    Objective 8

    182
    Answer Key: page 238 Answer Key: page 239

    Answer Key: page 238
    Answer Key: page 238

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS 183
    183 Page 184 185
    Objective 8
    183
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 81 Triangle MNO has a perimeter of 45 centimeters. Triangle MNO is dilated by a factor of 2 5 to produce triangle PQR . What is the perimeter
    of triangle PQR ?
    A 18 cm
    B 9 cm
    C 10 cm
    D 15 cm

    Question 82
    A cylindrical tank has a volume of 300 gallons. A similar tank next to it has dimensions that

    are 3 times as large. What is the volume of the larger tank?

    A 5400 gal
    B 2700 gal
    C 900 gal
    D 8100 gal

    Question 83
    A box shaped like a rectangular prism has a
    volume of 162 cubic inches. A smaller box has
    dimensions that are 2 3 the dimensions of the
    larger box. What is the volume of the smaller box?

    A 108 in. 3
    B 48 in. 3
    C 72 in. 3
    D 27 in. 3

    Answer Key: page 239

    Answer Key: page 239 Answer Key: page 239 184
    184 Page 185 186
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    184
    For this objective you should be able to
    identify proportional relationships in problem situations and
    solve problems;

    apply concepts of theoretical and experimental probability to
    make predictions;

    use statistical procedures to describe data; and

    evaluate predictions and conclusions based on statistical data.

    How Do You Solve Problems Involving Proportional Relationships?
    A ratio is a comparison of two quantities. A proportion is a statement that two ratios are equal. There are many real-life problems that involve

    proportional relationships. For example, you use proportions when converting units of measurement. You also use proportions to solve
    problems involving percents and rates.
    To solve problems that involve proportional relationships, follow these guidelines:

    Identify the ratios to be compared. Be certain to compare the
    corresponding quantities, in the same order.

    Write a proportion, an equation in which the two ratios are set
    equal to each other.

    Solve the proportion. Use the fact that the cross products in a
    proportion are equal.

    On a game show Mr. Williams answered 12 out of 15 questions correctly. What percent of the questions did Mr. Williams answer
    incorrectly?
    Mr. Williams answered 12 questions correctly. Therefore, he
    answered 15 12 3 questions incorrectly.

    Write a ratio that compares the number of questions answered

    incorrectly to the total number of questions: 3 15 .
    To nd the percent of questions answered incorrectly, nd the

    part of 100, or the ratio n 100 , that is equivalent to 3 15 .
    Write a proportion.
    n

    100
    3
    15

    The student will demonstrate an understanding of percents, proportional
    relationships, probability, and statistics in application problems.

    Objective 9 185
    185 Page 186 187
    Objective 9
    185
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS To solve for n , use cross products and then divide by 15. 15 n 3 100 15 n 300 n 20 Mr. Williams answered 20% of the questions incorrectly.

    Try It At this time last year, Alfredo had $ 145 in his savings account.
    Today he has $ 152.98. If his savings continue to grow at the same rate, how much money will he have in his account at this
    time next year?
    To nd the rate at which Alfredo s savings increased, divide the
    number of dollars by which his savings increased from last year
    to this year by $ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Alfredo s savings increased by
    $ 152.98 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    The rate by which his savings account grew is
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 145 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    0.055 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ %
    His savings should increase by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ % over the next year.
    Use a proportion to nd 5.5% of his current balance, $ 152.98.

    5. 5
    0000
    00 00
    0000
    x

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ x 5.5( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ )
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ x _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    x _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Alfredo s savings account at this time next year should have
    $ 152.98 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    To nd the rate at which his savings increased, divide the number of dollars
    by which his savings increased from last year to this year by $ 145. Alfredo s
    savings increased by $ 152.98 $ 145.00 $ 7.98. The rate by which his
    savings account grew is 7.98 145 0.055. 186
    186 Page 187 188
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    186
    0.055 5.5%
    His savings should increase by 5.5% over the next year.
    5. 5
    100
    x
    152. 98

    100 x 5.5( 152.98)

    100 x 841.39
    x 8.41
    Alfredo s savings account at this time next year should have
    $ 152.98 $ 8.41 $ 161.39.

    What Is Probability?
    Probability is a measure of how likely an event is to occur. The probability of an event occurring is the ratio of the number of favorable

    outcomes to the number of all possible outcomes. In a probability experiment, favorable outcomes are the outcomes that you are
    interested in.
    The probability, P , of an event occurring must be from 0 to 1.
    If an event is impossible, its probability is 0.

    If an event is certain to occur, its probability is 1.

    For example, the probability of drawing a blue marble from a bag containing 5 red marbles and 2 blue marbles is the ratio of the number

    of favorable outcomes, 2 blue marbles, to the number of possible outcomes, 7 marbles. The probability of drawing a blue marble is 2
    7 .
    This is often written as P ( blue) 2 7 .

    A fair number cube has faces numbered 1 to 6. What is the probability of rolling an even number?

    The sample space for this experiment is { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} . There are a total of 6 possible outcomes.
    A favorable outcome for this experiment is rolling a 2, 4, or 6. There are 3 favorable outcomes for this experiment.
    The probability of rolling an even number is the ratio of the number of favorable outcomes to the number of possible outcomes:
    3 out of 6, or 3 6 1 2 .

    1 5
    3

    Do you see that . . . 187
    187 Page 188 189
    Objective 9
    187
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    A probability experiment consists of rolling a fair number cube with faces numbered 1 through 6 and then tossing a fair coin.
    What is the probability of rolling a 3 on the number cube and tossing tails on the coin?

    There are 6 possible outcomes for rolling the number cube:
    1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. There is only one favorable outcome, rolling

    a 3. The probability of rolling a 3 on the number cube is 1 6 .

    P ( 3) 1 6

    How Do You Find the Probability of Compound Events?
    An event made up of a sequence of simple events is called a compound event . For example, ipping a coin and then rolling a number cube is a

    compound event.
    One way to nd the probability of a compound event is to multiply the probabilities of the simple events that make up the compound event.

    If P ( A ) represents the probability of event A and P ( B ) represents the probability of event B , then the probability of the compound event
    ( A and B ) can be represented algebraically.
    P ( A and B ) P ( A ) P ( B )
    For example, the probability of a fair coin landing heads up on one toss
    is P ( H ) 1 2 . The probability of a fair coin landing heads up on two
    tosses can be found as follows:
    P ( H and H ) P ( H ) P ( H ) 1 2 1 2 1 4
    When nding the probability of a compound event, you should rst determine whether the simple events included are dependent or

    independent events.
    If the outcome of the rst event affects the possible outcomes for
    the second event, the events are called dependent events .

    Suppose you draw 2 marbles, one at a time, from a bag with 4 white marbles and 1 red marble in it. You draw the second

    marble without replacing the rst one you drew. Does the outcome of the rst draw affect the likelihood of drawing a red
    marble on the second draw? Yes, because there were 5 marbles in the bag on the rst draw, but only 4 on the second draw. The
    events are dependent.
    If the outcome of the rst event does not affect the possible
    outcomes for the second event, the events are called independent events .

    Suppose you spin a spinner with the numbers 1 through 4 written on it, and then you spin it again. Does the outcome of
    the rst spin affect the likelihood of spinning a 3 on the second spin? No. The events are independent. 188
    188 Page 189 190
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    188
    There are two possible outcomes for tossing the coin: heads ( H )
    and tails ( T ) . There is only one favorable outcome, T . The

    probability of tossing tails on the coin is 1 2 .

    P ( T ) 1 2
    Find the probability of rolling a 3 on the number cube and
    tossing tails on the coin.

    P ( 3 and T ) P ( 3) P ( T ) 1

    6
    1
    2
    1
    12
    Another way to nd the probability of this compound event is to look at the sample space for this experiment and identify the

    favorable outcomes. This method works only if the outcomes are all equally likely. Use a table to list all the possible outcomes. The
    one favorable outcome is shaded.

    There are 12 possible outcomes, but only 1 of them is favorable. The probability of rolling a 3 on the number cube and tossing tails
    on the coin is 1 12 .
    This matches the result obtained using the rule for the probability of a compound event.

    P ( 3 and T ) P ( 3) P ( T ) 1 12
    Do you see that . . .

    Number Coin Cube
    1Heads
    1Tails
    2Heads
    2Tails
    3Heads
    3Tail
    4Heads
    4Tails
    5Heads
    5Tails
    6Heads
    6Tails

    Sample Space
    3Tails 189
    189 Page 190 191
    Objective 9
    189
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Do you see that . . .

    A jar contains 4 red balls, 5 green balls, and 3 black balls. A ball is drawn, and then a second ball is drawn without replacing the rst
    one. What is the probability of drawing two red balls in a row?
    There are 12 balls in the jar on the rst draw, and 11 balls in the jar on the second draw. The two events are dependent. The

    outcome of the rst ball drawn affects the possible outcome of the second ball drawn.

    Find the probability of drawing a red ball on the rst draw.
    There are 12 possible outcomes for the rst draw. There are 4 favorable outcomes, 4 red balls.

    P ( red rst) 4 12 1 3
    Find the probability of drawing a red ball on the second draw.
    There are now only 11 balls in the jar, so there are 11 possible outcomes for the second draw. Assume the rst ball drawn was

    red. There are 3 favorable outcomes, 3 red balls left in the jar.
    P ( redsecond) 3 11
    Find the compound probability.

    P ( red rst and redsecond) P ( red rst) P ( redsecond)
    1
    3
    3
    11
    3
    33
    1
    11

    The probability of drawing two red balls in a row is 1 11 .

    What Is the Difference Between Theoretical and Experimental Probability?
    The theoretical probability of an event occurring is the ratio comparing the number of ways the favorable outcomes should occur to the number
    of all possible outcomes. If you toss a coin, theoretically the coin
    should land on heads 1 2 of the time.
    P ( H ) 1 2 0.5
    The experimental probability of an event occurring is the ratio comparing the actual number of times the favorable outcome occurs in a

    series of repeated trials to the total number of trials. If you toss a coin 100 times, it is possible that the coin will land heads up 48 times and tails
    up 52 times. The experimental probability of the coin landing heads up
    in this situation would be 48 100 .

    P ( H ) 48 100 0.48
    The two types of probabilities, theoretical and experimental, are not always equal. In this case the theoretical probability is 0.5, but the

    experimental probability is 0.48.
    For a given situation the experimental probability is usually close to, but slightly different from, the theoretical probability. The greater the

    number of trials, the closer the experimental probability should be to the theoretical probability. 190
    190 Page 191 192
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    190
    How Do You Use Probability to Make Predictions and Decisions?
    You can use either theoretical or experimental probabilities to make predictions. If you know the probability of an event occurring and you

    also know the total number of trials, then you can predict the likely number of favorable outcomes.

    Write a ratio that represents the probability of an event occurring.
    Write a ratio that compares the number of favorable outcomes to
    the number of trials.

    Write a proportion.

    Solve the proportion.

    A spinner in a game has 4 equal-sized regions: red, green, blue, and yellow. A group of players makes 40 trial spins and creates
    the table below.

    How does the theoretical probability of landing on green compare to the experimental results?
    Since the colored regions are of equal size, the spinner is equally
    likely to land on any one of the colored regions. There are four possible outcomes for this experiment: red, green, blue, and

    yellow. There is one favorable outcome: green. The theoretical
    probability of landing on the green is 1 4 , or P ( green) 0.25.
    The experimental probability of landing on green is the ratio
    of the number of times the spinner landed on green in the experiment to the total number of spins. The spinner landed

    on green 12 times out of 40 spins. The experimental probability
    of landing on green is 12 40 3 10 , or P ( green) 0.3.
    The experimental probability, 0.3, and the theoretical probability, 0.25, are close to each other but not equal.

    Color Frequency
    Red 9
    Green 12
    Blue 10
    Yellow 9

    The number of trials in an experiment is the
    number of times the experiment is repeated.
    If you toss a coin 100 times, you will
    complete 100 trials of a coin-toss experiment. 191
    191 Page 192 193
    Objective 9
    191
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A manufacturer tests 125 lightbulbs to determine the number of hours the lightbulbs last. The results are shown in the table below.

    Based on the experimental results, how many lightbulbs from a shipment of 50,000 lightbulbs should be expected to last at least
    1,000 hours?
    Find the experimental probability that a lightbulb will last
    at least 1,000 hours.

    Based on the table, a total of 50 40 90 lightbulbs lasted at least 1,000 hours. There were a total of 125 trials. The

    experimental probability that a lightbulb will last at least
    1,000 hours is 90 125 18 25 .
    Write a proportion.
    18
    25 50,
    x
    000
    Solve by using cross products and dividing by 25.

    25 x 18 50,000 25 x 900,000

    x 36,000
    Therefore, 36,000 lightbulbs from the shipment of 50,000 lightbulbs should be expected to last at least 1,000 hours.

    Outcome Frequency ( hours)
    950 974 15
    975 999 20
    1,000 1,024 50
    1,025 1,049 40

    Try It Some sophomores were surveyed about which candidate they plan
    to vote for in the upcoming class-representative election. The results of the survey are shown below.

    If there are 315 sophomores in the school, what is the best estimate of the number of votes Alicia will receive?
    Candidate Frequency
    Alex 16
    Terry 8
    Alicia 11 192
    192 Page 193 194
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    192
    Find the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ probability of a sophomore voting for
    Alicia. Of the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ students who were surveyed, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ said
    they plan to vote for Alicia. The experimental probability of a

    sophomore voting for Alicia is . There are _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    sophomores in the school. Let n represent the number of sophomores
    who will vote for _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Write a proportion and solve.

    35 n _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    35 n _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    n _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    Based on the survey, the best estimate of the number of votes Alicia
    will receive is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    Find the experimental probability of a sophomore voting for Alicia. Of the 35
    students who were surveyed, 11 said they plan to vote for Alicia. The

    experimental probability of a sophomore voting for Alicia is 11 35 . There are
    315 sophomores in the school. Let n represent the number of sophomores
    who will vote for Alicia.
    n
    315
    11
    35

    35 n 11 315
    35 n 3465

    35
    35n
    35
    3465

    n 99
    Based on the survey, the best estimate of the number of votes Alicia will
    receive is 99.

    n
    35

    35 n 3465 193
    193 Page 194 195
    Objective 9
    193
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Mode

    Median

    Mean
    Range
    Use the range to show how much the
    numbers vary.

    For the set { 1, 4, 9, 3, 1, 6} the range is
    9 1 8.

    The range of a set of data describes how
    big a spread there is from the largest
    value in the set to the smallest value.

    Use the mean to show the numerical
    average of a set of data.

    For the set { 1, 4, 9, 3, 1, 6} the mean is
    the sum, 24, divided by the number of
    items, 6. The mean is 24 ÷ 6 4.

    The mean of a set of data describes the
    average of the numbers. To find the
    mean, add all the numbers and then
    divide by the number of items in the
    set.

    The mean of a set of data can be greatly
    affected if one of the numbers is an
    outlier, a number that is very different
    in value from the other numbers in the
    set.

    The mean is a good measure of central
    tendency to use when a set of data does
    not have any outliers.

    Use the median to show which number
    in a set of data is in the middle when
    the numbers are listed in order.

    For the set { 1, 4, 9, 3, 6} the median is
    4 because it is in the middle when the
    numbers are listed in order:
    { 1, 3, 4, 6, 9} .

    For the set { 1, 4, 9, 3, 1, 6} the median
    is 3 2 4 3.5 because 3 and 4 are in the
    middle when the numbers are listed in
    order: { 1, 1, 3, 4, 6, 9} . Their values
    must be averaged to nd the median.

    The median of a set of data describes
    the middle value when the set is
    ordered from greatest to least or from
    least to greatest. If there are an even
    number of values, the median is the
    average of the two middle values.

    Half the values are greater than the
    median, and half the values are less
    than the median.

    The median is a good measure of central
    tendency to use when a set of data has
    an outlier, a number that is very
    different in value from the other
    numbers in the set.

    Use the mode to show which value or
    values in a set of data occur most
    often.

    For the set { 1, 4, 9, 3, 1, 6} the mode is
    1 because it occurs most frequently.

    The set { 1, 4, 3, 3, 1, 6} has two modes,
    1 and 3, because they both occur twice
    and most frequently.

    The mode of a set of data describes
    which value occurs most frequently. If
    two or more numbers occur the same
    number of times and more often than
    all the other numbers in the set, those
    numbers are all modes for the data set.

    If each of the numbers in a set occurs
    the same number of times, the set of
    data has no mode.

    How Do You Use Mode, Median, Mean, and Range to Describe Data?
    There are many ways to describe the characteristics of a set of data. The mode, median, and mean are all called measures of central tendency .

    To decide which of these measures to use to describe a set of data, look at the numbers and ask yourself, What am I trying to show about the data? 194
    194 Page 195 196
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    194
    Each night for one week, a restaurant manager recorded the number of customers who came for dinner. The results are shown
    in the table below.

    Which measure of the data would best describe the number of customers who eat in the restaurant on a typical night?
    The range is the difference between the largest value and the
    smallest: 149 55 94. The range does not describe the number of customers who eat in the restaurant on a typical night.

    Each of the numbers in the set of data occurs only once. The set
    of data has no mode.

    The mean number of customers is approximately 73. However,
    the number of customers on Saturday night, 149, is much higher than the number of customers on any other night.

    This data point is an outlier.
    In this case, the mean does not give a very good representation of the number of customers who eat in the restaurant on a

    typical night; it is too high.
    The median number of customers is found by listing the
    number of customers in order and nding the middle value. Listed in order, the numbers are { 55, 57, 58, 60, 65, 66, 149} .

    The middle number is 60. The median, 60, is not affected by the outlier.

    In this case, the median best describes the number of customers who eat in the restaurant on a typical night.

    Night Customers
    Sunday 58
    Monday 57
    Tuesday 60
    Wednesday 55
    Thursday 65
    Friday 66
    Saturday 149

    Do you see that . . . 195
    195 Page 196 197
    Objective 9
    195
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS A science club sold candy bars to raise money. The table shows the number of candy bars sold during the rst ve days of the sale. On the sixth day of the sale, the club sold only 56 candy bars. How does the signi cantly smaller
    number of candy bars sold on the sixth day affect the different measures of the data?
    R a n g e
    The range is the difference between the largest value and the smallest.
    For the rst 5 days, the range is 122 103 19.

    With the sixth day included, the range is 122 56 66.

    The range of values increases signi cantly because the sixth value, an outlier, is well outside the previous range.

    M e d i a n
    The median is found by listing the number of candy bars sold in order and picking the middle value.

    For the rst 5 days: 103, 115, 117, 117, 122
    median 117
    With the sixth day included: 56, 103, 115, 117, 117, 122

    median ( 115 117) 2 116
    The median value is not signi cantly affected by the outlier.
    M o d e
    The mode of a set of numbers tells which value occurs most frequently.
    For the rst 5 days, the mode is 117.

    With the sixth day included, the mode is still 117.

    The mode is not affected by the outlier.
    M e a n
    The mean is the average of the values.
    For the rst 5 days:

    114.8
    With the sixth day added, the mean is:

    105
    Since 56 is much smaller than the other values, it signi cantly lowers the mean.

    103 115 122 117 117 56
    6

    103 115 122 117 117
    5

    Day Number
    1 103
    2 115
    3 122
    4 117
    5 117 196
    196 Page 197 198
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    196
    How Do You Use Graphs to Represent Data?
    There are many ways to represent data graphically. Bar graphs, histograms, and circle graphs are three types of graphs used to display

    data. Graphical representations of data often make it easier to see relationships in the data. However, if the conclusions drawn from a
    graph are to be valid, you must read and interpret the data from the graph accurately.

    A bar graph uses bars of different heights or lengths to show the relationships between different groups or categories of data.

    The bar graph below shows the number of people in a town who attended one of two different movies, A or B, on each of six days
    last week. What conclusions can you draw about the number of people attending each of the movies each day?

    The graph shows that more people attended each of the two
    movies on Saturday than on any other day.

    For the week, more people attended Movie B than Movie A.

    The least number of people attended either movie on
    Wednesday.

    The combined attendance at both movies on Monday and
    Thursday was the same.

    Number
    of People

    Movie Attendance

    Day
    Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri. Sat. 0

    50
    100
    150
    200
    250
    300
    350

    A B 197
    197 Page 198 199
    Objective 9
    197
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    The histogram shows the ages of people attending a symphony performance. Their ages are divided into equal 10-year intervals.
    What conclusions can you draw from the graph about attendance at the performance?
    The broken line on the vertical axis means that attendance values from 0 through 9 are not shown in the graph. Using the broken
    line allows the graph to have shorter bars. Because of this, the lengths of the bars should not be used to make direct comparisons.
    Instead, read the values from the graph and compare them.
    A total of 24 people between the ages of 30 and 39 attended the
    performance. This age group had the greatest number of people in attendance.

    Number
    of People

    Attendance at a Symphony Performance

    Age ( years) 0 9 10 19 20 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 70 79 80 89
    0

    10
    12
    14
    16
    18
    20
    22
    24

    A histogram is a special kind of bar graph that shows the number of data points that fall within speci c intervals of values. The intervals
    into which the data s range is divided should be equal. If the intervals are not equal, the graph could be misleading and result in invalid
    conclusions.
    Look at the histogram below showing the number of dogs of various weights in a kennel.

    Number
    of
    Dogs

    Dog Weights in a Kennel

    Weight
    ( nearest pound)

    10 19 20 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 70 79 0
    2
    4
    6
    8
    10
    12
    14
    16
    18
    20

    Fourteen dogs weighed
    between 20 and 29 pounds.

    Two dogs weighed
    between 70 and 79 pounds.

    The greatest number of dogs
    weighed between 40 and 49 pounds.

    Do you see that . . . 198
    198 Page 199 200
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    198
    A total of 20 people between the ages of 20 and 29 attended
    the performance, and 10 people between the ages of 0 and 9 attended. Twice as many people between the ages of 20 and 29

    attended the performance as people between the ages of 0 and 9.
    If you had compared the bar lengths for these two data intervals you could have reached an invalid conclusion. The bar for one

    is about ve times as large as for the other, yet the numerical value is only twice as large.

    A circle graph represents a set of data by showing the relative size of the parts that make up the whole. The circle represents the whole, or
    the sum of all the data elements. Each section of the circle represents a part of the whole. The number of degrees in the central angle of the
    section should be proportional to the number of degrees in a circle, 360 ° .

    Suppose you were constructing a circle graph that compared the number of school-sponsored sports teams on which juniors in your
    school play. Their participation data are shown in the table below.

    What size central angle should be used for the sector of the circle used to represent the students who play no sports?
    One way to solve this problem is to rst nd the percent of the circle that should be used to represent the students who play no sports.
    The table represents a total of 200 students. Since 80 of them play
    no sports, the fraction of students who play no sports is 80 200 .
    Convert 80
    200 to a percent. 80

    200
    40
    100 40%
    So, 40% of the students play no sports. Therefore, 40% of the circle should be used to represent students who play no sports.

    Next, nd what central angle should be used for the sector of the circle used to represent students who play no sports. Since a circle
    has 360 ° , nd 40% of 360 ° . 40
    100
    n
    360

    100 n 14,400

    n 144

    # of Sports # of Students
    080
    150
    240
    3 or more 30

    Juniors Playing Sports 199
    199 Page 200 201
    Objective 9
    199
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Customers at a grocery store were asked which brand of soft drink they prefer. The results of the survey are shown in the circle graph
    below.

    What conclusions can you draw about the soft-drink preferences of the customers at the store?
    The graph shows that the most preferred brand is Brand A, 38% .
    The graph shows that 25% , or 1
    4 , of the customers surveyed preferred Brand D.

    The smallest fraction of customers, 10% , had no preference in
    soft drinks.

    Soft-Drink Preferences
    Brand
    A Brand

    B

    Brand
    C

    No
    preference

    Brand
    D

    38%
    12%

    15%
    10%
    25%

    A central angle of 144 ° should be used for the sector of the circle used to represent the students who play no sports.
    Juniors Playing Sports
    No sports
    40%

    1 sport
    25%

    2 sports
    20%

    3 or more sports
    15% 144 200
    200 Page 201 202
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 9

    200
    The graph below shows the average populations of three cities during three ve-year intervals.
    For which city was the increase in population the greatest between 1985 and 1999?
    The population of City C decreased between 1985 and 1999.
    The population of City B increased between 1985 and 1999. Find
    the increase in population. The lowest average population, approximately 75,000, was during the period 1985 1989, and

    the highest average population, approximately 110,000, was during the period 1995 1999. The approximate increase in
    population was 110,000 75,000 35,000 people.
    The population of City A increased between 1985 and 1999. Find
    the increase in population. The lowest average population, approximately 30,000, was during the period 1985 1989, and

    the highest average population, approximately 80,000, was during the period 1995 1999. The approximate increase in
    population was 80,000 30,000 50,000 people.
    The increase in population between 1985 and 1999 was the greatest for City A.

    Population
    ( thousands
    of people)

    Changes in Population

    Period
    1985 1989 0

    City A City B City C
    1990 1994 1995 1999
    25
    50
    75
    100
    125
    150
    175
    200

    Now practice what you ve learned. 201
    201 Page 202 203
    Objective 9
    201
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 84 Rhonda estimated it would take 12 hours to complete her research project. If this represents only 80% of the number of hours it actually took her to complete the project, how many hours did
    Rhonda spend on the project?
    A 9.6 h
    B 15 h
    C 3 h
    D 960 h

    Question 85
    A factory worker can manufacture 35 electronic switches in 1.5 hours. At this rate, how many

    hours will it take him to manufacture 210 switches?

    A 6 h
    B 9 h
    C 4900 h
    D 140 h

    Question 86
    Jonathan draws two tickets from a box to select the door-prize winners at a party. The tickets are

    numbered from 1 to 25. What is the probability that both of the tickets drawn will have numbers
    less than 5?
    A 5 1 0
    B 7 2 5
    C 6 1 2 2 5
    D 1 5

    Question 87
    Reggie is a professional baseball player. He has the following batting record.

    Based on this record, what is the probability that Reggie will get a hit during his next time at bat?
    A 0.413
    B 0.186
    C 0.292
    D 0.366

    Type of Hit Number
    Singles 210
    Doubles 20
    Tri ples 1
    Home runs 6
    No hits 574

    Answer Key: page 239
    Answer Key: page 240

    Answer Key: page 240 Answer Key: page 239 202
    202 Page 203 204
    Objective 9
    202
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 88
    A horticulturist selected a sample of seeds from a crop. She planted the seeds, and after 3 months

    she measured the height of each plant to the nearest eighth of an inch. The results are shown
    in the table below.

    Based on the results in the table, how many seeds out of 600 could the horticulturist expect to reach
    a height of at least 2 inches in 3 months?
    A 450
    B 550
    C 528
    D 384

    Question 89
    Jean is a member of the school s bowling club. At the last practice session, each team member

    bowled 3 games and recorded his or her score on a master list. Which measure of the data should
    Jean use if she wants to identify the score that has as many scores below it as above it?

    A Mean
    B Mode
    C Median
    D Range

    Height Number of ( inches) Plants
    0 1 7 8 9
    2 3 7 8 16
    4 5 7 8 26
    6 or 24 more

    Answer Key: page 240 Answer Key: page 240 203
    203 Page 204 205
    Objective 9
    203
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 90 The table below represents Trish s expenses for a scuba-diving vacation in the Caribbean. Trish s Scuba Vacation

    Which graph matches the information in the table?

    Plane
    fare

    Dive
    boat

    Cab
    fares

    Gifts

    Hotel

    Food
    Plane
    fare

    Dive
    boat
    Cab
    fares

    Gifts

    Hotel
    Food

    Plane
    fare

    Dive
    boat

    Cab
    fares

    Gifts

    Hotel

    Food
    Plane
    fare

    Dive
    boat

    Cab
    fares

    Gifts
    Hotel

    Food

    Expense Amount ( dollars)
    Plane fare 600
    Food 200
    Hotel 360
    Cab fares 40
    Gifts 50
    Dive boat 250

    Answer Key: page 240
    AC
    BD
    204
    204 Page 205 206
    Objective 9
    204
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 91
    The graph below represents car sales at a dealership for the rst four months of the year.

    Car Sales

    Which of the tables below represents the data in the graph?
    AC

    BD
    Month Cars Sold
    January 1100
    February 1900
    March 2900
    April 2400

    Month Cars Sold
    January 1100
    February 2400
    March 3100
    April 2600

    Month Cars Sold
    January 1500
    February 2900
    March 3100
    April 2400

    Month Cars Sold
    January 900
    February 2400
    March 2900
    April 2400

    Cars Sold
    ( thousands)

    Month
    Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr.

    5
    1
    0

    2
    3
    4

    Answer Key: page 241 205
    205 Page 206 207
    Objective 9
    205
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Question 92 The total number of hours Ava spent studying each week for the rst 8 weeks of school are shown in the table below.

    Which measure should Ava use to show the number of hours she most frequently spends
    studying in a school week?
    A Mean
    B Median
    C Mode
    D Range

    Question 93
    The graph shows CD sales at a music store for 6 consecutive weeks.

    Based on the data in the graph, which of the following conclusions is true?
    A Sales increased at a constant rate each week over the six-week period.
    B The store sold an average of approximately 289 CDs per week over the six-week period.
    C Three times as many CDs were sold during the sixth week as during the rst week.
    D The store sold more than 1800 CDs during the six-week period.

    Number
    Sold

    CD Sales

    1234
    295
    300

    275
    0

    280
    285
    290

    5 6

    Week Hours Studying
    14
    27
    34
    47
    57
    66
    77
    87

    Answer Key: page 241 Answer Key: page 241 206
    206 Page 207 208
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    206
    The Bradley family is planning a summer vacation. They expect to drive a total of 250 to 300 miles. Their car gets 20 miles per gallon
    of gasoline, and gas is expected to cost from $ 1.35 per gallon to $ 1.55 per gallon. Based on this information, what is the least
    amount the Bradley family should expect to spend on fuel for their vacation? What is the greatest amount?

    What information is given?
    length of trip: 250 to 300 miles
    gas mileage: 20 mpg
    cost of gas: $ 1.35/ gal to $ 1.55/ gal
    What do you need to nd?

    You need to nd the number of gallons of gas the Bradleys could use and, based on those gures, the total cost of the

    gasoline.

    For this objective you should be able to
    apply mathematics to everyday experiences and activities;

    communicate about mathematics; and
    use logical reasoning.

    How Do You Apply Math to Everyday Experiences?
    Suppose you want to compute the likelihood of winning an election based on the results of a random survey. Or suppose you need to

    estimate the volume of a container based on its dimensions. Finding the solution to problems such as these often requires the use of math.

    Solving problems involves more than just arithmetic; logical reasoning and careful planning also play very important roles. The steps in
    problem solving include understanding the problem, making a plan, carrying out the plan, and evaluating the solution to determine
    whether it is reasonable.

    The student will demonstrate an understanding of the mathematical processes
    and tools used in problem solving.

    Objective 10 207
    207 Page 208 209
    Objective 10
    207
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Find the number of gallons of gas that could be used minimum and maximum amounts. Divide the number of miles to be traveled by the rate the gas will be used, 20 mpg. Calculate rst using the minimum gure for the length of the
    trip, 250 miles, and then using the maximum, 300 miles.
    Find the minimum and maximum possible cost of the gasoline.

    Multiply the cost of gasoline by the number of gallons to be used.
    Calculate rst using the minimum cost of the gasoline, $ 1.35/ gal, and then using the maximum, $ 1.55/ gal.

    Find the number of gallons of gas that will be used.

    Find the cost of the gas that will be used.

    The least amount the Bradley family should expect to spend on gasoline for their vacation is $ 16.88, and the greatest amount
    is $ 23.25.

    Minimum Calculation Maximum Calculation
    250 miles 300 miles
    250 miles 20 mpg 300 miles 20 mpg 12.5 gallons 15 gallons

    Minimum Calculation Maximum Calculation
    12.5 gallons at $ 1.35/ gal 15 gallons at $ 1.55/ gal
    12.5 gallons $ 1.35/ gal 15 gallons $ 1.55/ gal $ 16.88 $ 23.25 208
    208 Page 209 210
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 10

    208
    Try It A group of hikers at a state park follow the trail shown on the map
    below. They hike from the parking lot to the waterfall and then to a scenic overlook. From the overlook the group hikes back to the
    parking lot.

    If 1 inch on the map equals 2 miles, to the nearest tenth of a mile how far did the group hike?
    What information are you given in the problem?
    The distance from the waterfall to the overlook is _ _ _ _ _ _ inches on the map.

    The distance from the overlook to the parking lot is
    _ _ _ _ _ _ inch on the map.
    The scale used on the map is _ _ _ _ _ _ inch _ _ _ _ _ _ miles.

    You need to nd the distance in miles from the parking lot to the waterfall.

    The hikers path forms a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ triangle.
    The distance from the parking lot to the waterfall is the
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the triangle.
    Find this distance on the map using the Pythagorean Theorem.

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ this distance to the two known distances on the map.
    Use the map s scale to nd the actual distance the group hiked.

    Waterfall
    Parking
    lot
    Scenic
    overlook 1 in.

    2 in.

    See Objective 8,
    page 170, for more
    information about
    the Pythagorean
    Theorem. 209
    209 Page 210 211
    Objective 10
    209
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Substitute the values for a and b into the Pythagorean Theorem and solve for c . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ c 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ c 2
    _ _ _ _ _ _ c 2
    c

    c _ _ _ _ _ _ inches
    On the map the total distance of the hike is
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ inches.
    Use the scale to convert the distance to miles.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ miles
    The question asks for the total distance to the nearest
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of a mile.
    The total distance the group hiked is _ _ _ _ _ _ miles.

    The distance from the waterfall to the overlook is 2 inches on the map.
    The distance from the overlook to the parking lot is 1 inch on the map.
    The scale used on the map is 1 inch 2 miles.

    The hikers path forms a right triangle. . The distance from the parking lot to
    the waterfall is the hypotenuse of the triangle. Add this distance to the two
    known distances on the map.

    a 2 b 2 c 2
    1 2 2 2 c 2
    5 c 2
    5 c
    c
    2.24 inches
    On the map the total distance of the hike is 2.24 1 2 5.24 inches.
    The distance in miles is 5.24 2 10.48 10.5 miles. The question asks
    for the total distance to the nearest tenth of a mile. The total distance the
    group hiked is 10.5 miles. 210
    210 Page 211 212
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 10

    210
    What Is a Problem-Solving Strategy?
    A problem-solving strategy is a plan for solving a problem. Different strategies work better for different types of problems. Sometimes you

    can use more than one strategy to solve a problem. As you practice solving problems, you will discover which strategies you prefer and
    which work best in various situations.
    Some problem-solving strategies include
    drawing a picture;

    looking for a pattern;
    guessing and checking;
    acting it out;
    making a table;
    working a simpler problem; and
    working backwards.

    Alfonso is pouring liquid gelatin from a container into four small gelatin molds. The liquid gelatin is in a cylindrical container with
    a diameter of 10 centimeters. It lls the container to a level of 15.9 cm. Each of the gelatin molds is a rectangular prism that is
    5 cm by 7.5 cm by 8.1 cm. Will Alfonso be able to transfer all of the gelatin from the cylindrical container into the four molds? If
    not, how many cubic centimeters of gelatin will remain after he lls the molds?

    Draw a picture of the containers and label the dimensions.

    The dimensions of the cylinder and the dimensions of the
    prisms are given in the problem.

    You need to nd the volume of the cylinder and the combined
    volume of the four rectangular prisms.

    15.9 cm
    10 cm

    7.5 cm 5 cm
    8.1 cm
    7.5 cm
    5 cm

    8.1 cm

    7.5 cm 5 cm
    8.1 cm
    7.5 cm 5 cm
    8.1 cm 211
    211 Page 212 213
    Objective 10
    211
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Find the volume of the cylinder. Use the formula for the area of a
    circle, A r 2 , to nd the area of the circular base. The diameter is 10 cm, so the radius, r , is 5 cm. Use the area of the base to

    calculate the volume of the gelatin using the formula V Bh .
    A r 2 V Bh A
    5 2 V 78.5 15.9 A 25 V 1248.15 cm 3

    A 78.5 cm 2
    The volume of the gelatin is approximately 1248 cm 3 .
    Find the combined volume of the four rectangular prisms.
    The area of the rectangular base equals its length times its width.

    B 5 7.5 37.5 cm 2 V Bh

    V 37.5 8.1 V 303.75 cm 3

    The total volume of the four smaller containers is 4 303.75 1215 cm 3 .
    Since 1215 1248, the liquid gelatin will not fit in the four containers. There will be about 33 cubic centimeters ( 1248 1215)
    of liquid gelatin remaining.

    At a business meeting each person in the room shakes hands with every other person. If there are 5 people at the meeting, how many
    handshakes take place?
    One way to solve this problem is to draw a picture.
    Draw 5 points representing the 5 people.

    To model the handshakes, draw a line segment connecting each point to the four other points. Each point represents one person.
    Count the number of line segments. There are 10 line segments.
    At the meeting, ten handshakes take place. 212
    212 Page 213 214
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 10

    212
    Try It A store sells boxes of candy wrapped in decorative paper. Each
    box is in the shape of a rectangular prism with the following
    dimensions: length 6 5 8 inches, width 4 1 4 inches, and height
    2 15 16 inches. Wrapping a box requires about 20% more paper
    than the box s surface area. Approximately how many square feet of paper would be needed to wrap 200 boxes of candy?

    Estimate the answer by rounding the dimensions of the box to the nearest inch.

    6 5 8 inches _ _ _ _ _ _ inches
    4 1 4 inches _ _ _ _ _ _ inches
    2 15 16 inches _ _ _ _ _ _ inches
    Find the surface area of one candy box.
    Each surface is shaped like a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
    Find the surface area by nding the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ of the areas of all the surfaces.

    S 2( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 2( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ) 2( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ )
    _ _ _ _ _ _ square inches
    Multiply by _ _ _ _ _ _ to nd the combined surface area of all the boxes.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 2
    There are 12 inches in 1 foot and 144 square inches in 1 square foot.

    Divide by _ _ _ _ _ _ to convert the surface area to square feet.
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ in. 2 144 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 170 ft 2
    It takes 20% more paper to wrap a box than its surface area. Find 20% of _ _ _ _ _ _ .

    20% of _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.20( _ _ _ _ _ _ ) _ _ _ _ _ _ ft 2
    Find the total number of square feet of paper needed to wrap the candy boxes.

    _ _ _ _ _ _ ft 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ ft 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ ft 2
    The store would need approximately _ _ _ _ _ _ square feet of paper to wrap 200 candy boxes. 213
    213 Page 214 215
    6 5 8 inches 7 inches
    4 1 4 inches 4 inches
    2 1 1 5 6 inches 3 inches
    Each surface is shaped like a rectangle. Find the surface area by nding the
    sum of the areas of all the surfaces.

    S 2( 7 4) 2( 4 3) 2( 7 3) 122 square inches
    Multiply by 200 to nd the combined surface area of all the boxes.
    122 in. 2 200 24,400 in. 2
    Divide by 144 to convert the surface area to square feet.
    24,400 in. 2 144 169.44 170 ft 2
    It takes 20% more paper to wrap a box than its surface area. Find 20%
    of 170.

    20% of 170 0.20( 170) 34 ft 2
    170 ft 2 34 ft 2 204 ft 2
    The store would need approximately 204 square feet of paper to wrap
    200 candy boxes.

    Objective 10

    213
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS 214
    214 Page 215 216
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 10

    214
    How Do You Communicate About Mathematics?
    It is important to be able to rewrite a problem using mathematical language and symbols. The words in the problem will give clues

    about the operations that you will need in order to solve the problem. In some problems it may be necessary to use algebraic symbols to
    represent quantities and then use equations to express the relationships between the quantities. In other problems you may need to represent
    the given information using a table or graph.

    The function h 16 t 2 400 represents the height in feet, h , of an object dropped from a height of 400 feet in terms of t , the
    number of seconds it falls. The following graph represents this relationship.

    Why is the graph of this relationship restricted to Quadrant I?
    All points in Quadrants II, III, and IV have at least one negative coordinate. If this graph were extended into those quadrants, then

    either an h or t value would be negative, or both.
    In this problem the variable t can only be positive because it represents the number of seconds during which the object falls.

    The number of seconds begins at 0. It ends at some positive value, the number of seconds when the object hits the ground. The
    number of seconds cannot be negative.
    In this problem the variable h can only have positive values because it represents the height of the object above the ground.

    Height begins at 400 feet and ends at 0 feet, the height of the object when it hits the ground. The object is never below the
    ground, so h is never negative.
    Since neither t nor h can be negative, this graph cannot be drawn in Quadrants II, III, or IV.

    0
    100
    200
    300
    400
    500

    1 2 3 456

    h
    t
    Height
    ( feet)

    Time ( seconds)

    Do you see that . . .

    See Objective 5,
    page 109, for more
    information about
    quadratic functions. 215
    215 Page 216 217
    Objective 10
    215
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It The following table summarizes the number of points scored per game by a player on the Central High School boys basketball team for the rst 10 games of the season.
    Basketball Scoring Record

    If the scoring record above is used to predict the number of points he is likely to score at his next game, what is the probability that he
    will score more points than his mean score for the rst 10 games?
    His mean score to date is the total number of points he has scored divided by the number of games he has played.

    ( 12 18 26 15 8 12 20 14 13 18) _ _ _ _ _ _
    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    _ _ _ _ _ _
    To nd the probability of scoring above his mean score, nd the number of favorable outcomes, the number of games in which he

    scored _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ his mean.
    In _ _ _ _ _ _ out of the last 10 games, he scored over 15.6 points.

    The probability that he will score more than 15.6 points is 10 .

    ( 12 18 26 15 8 12 20 14 13 18) 10 156 10 15.6
    To nd the probability of scoring above his mean score, nd the number
    of favorable outcomes, the number of games in which he scored above
    his mean. In 4 out of the last 10 games, he scored over 15.6 points. The

    probability that he will score more than 15.6 points is 1 4 0 .

    Game Points Scored
    112
    218
    326
    415
    58
    612
    720
    814
    913
    10 18 216
    216 Page 217 218
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 10

    216
    How Do You Use Logical Reasoning as a Problem-Solving Tool?
    You can use logical reasoning to nd patterns in a set of data. You can then use those patterns to draw conclusions about the data.

    Finding patterns involves identifying characteristics that objects or numbers have in common. Look for the pattern in different ways. A
    sequence of geometric objects may have some property in common. For example, they may all be rectangular prisms or all be dilations of
    the same object.

    The following table shows a series of dilations of a rectangle.

    By what scale factor would the next rectangle in the series be dilated?
    To nd the pattern, you must rst nd the scale factor used in each dilation. To do so, nd the ratio of corresponding sides.

    The scale factors are decreasing by 0.1 at each step. If the pattern continues, the scale factor for the next dilation should be
    0.7 0.1 0.6.

    Dilation Length Width ( inches) ( inches)
    112050
    210845
    386. 436
    460.48 25.2

    Dilation Length Width Scale Factor ( inches) ( inches)
    1 120 50

    2 108 45 108 120 45 50 0.9
    3 86.4 36 86. 108 4 36 45 0.8
    4 60.48 25.2 60. 86. 4 48 36 25. 2 0. 7

    See Objective 6,
    page 142, for more
    information about
    dilations. 217
    217 Page 218 219
    Objective 10
    217
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS Try It The graph below summarizes the percent of students from each grade who voted for Candidate A and Candidate B, the top two candidates in a school election.

    If the voting pattern established by the 9th, 10th, and 11th graders continues, how many votes should Candidate B expect to get from
    the 320 twelfth graders who voted?
    Look for a pattern in the data.

    The percent of 9th-grade students voting for Candidate B was
    _ _ _ _ _ _ % more than the percent voting for Candidate A.
    The percent of 10th-grade students voting for Candidate B was
    _ _ _ _ _ _ % more than the percent voting for Candidate A.
    The percent of 11th-grade students voting for Candidate B was
    _ _ _ _ _ _ % more than the percent voting for Candidate A.

    If the pattern continues, the percent of 12th-grade students voting
    for Candidate B should be _ _ _ _ _ _ % more than the percent voting for
    Candidate A.

    Student Election
    10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 0% 60%
    A B

    12th grade
    11th grade

    10th grade
    9th grade 218
    218 Page 219 220
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS Objective 10

    218
    If _ _ _ _ _ _ % of the 12th graders voted for Candidate A, then
    _ _ _ _ _ _ % 20% _ _ _ _ _ _ % should vote for Candidate B.
    Find _ _ _ _ _ _ % of 320 students. Write a proportion.

    100
    x

    100 x _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
    100 x _ _ _ _ _ _
    x _ _ _ _ _ _
    Candidate B should get _ _ _ _ _ _ votes from the 12th graders.

    The percent of 9th-grade students voting for Candidate B was 5% more
    than the percent voting for Candidate A. The percent of 10th-grade students
    voting for Candidate B was 10% more than the percent voting for Candidate
    A. The percent of 11th-grade students voting for Candidate B was 15% more
    than the percent voting for Candidate A.

    If the pattern continues, the percent of 12th-grade students voting for
    Candidate B should be 20% more than the percent voting for Candidate A.
    If 25% of the 12th graders voted for Candidate A, then 25% 20% 45%
    should vote for Candidate B. Find 45% of 320 students.
    45
    100
    x
    320

    100 x 45 320

    100 x 14,440
    x 144
    Candidate B should get 144 votes from the 12th graders. 219
    219 Page 220 221
    Objective 10
    219
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    The solution to a problem can be justi ed by identifying the mathematical properties or relationships that produced the answer.
    You should have a reason for drawing a conclusion, and you should be able to explain that reason.

    The table below shows the number of people who owned homes in Williamstown for several different years.
    Home Ownership in Williamstown

    Did the number of people who owned homes increase by the same percent each year during this period?
    First check whether the number of people who owned homes increased each year. Then check whether the percent increase is
    the same for each year.
    To nd the percent increase from 1998 to 1999, subtract the
    number of people owning homes in 1998 from the number owning homes in 1999. Then divide by the number owning

    homes in 1998.
    Percent increase 24,750 22, 500 22,500 2, 22, 250 500 0.10 10%

    To nd the percent increase from 1999 to 2000, subtract the
    number of people owning homes in 1999 from the number owning homes in 2000. Then divide by the number owning

    homes in 1999.
    Percent increase 27,225 24, 750 24,750 2, 24, 475 750 0.10 10%

    To nd the percent increase from 2000 to 2001, subtract the
    number of people owning homes in 2000 from the number owning homes in 2001. Then divide by the number owning

    homes in 2000.
    Percent increase 28,300 27, 225 27,225 1, 27, 075 225 0.0395 4%

    The percent increase from 2000 to 2001 is less than the percent increase for the previous years. The number of people who owned
    homes did not increase by the same percent each year.

    Year Number
    1998 22,500
    1999 24,750
    2000 27,225
    2001 28,300

    Now practice what you ve learned. 220
    220 Page 221 222
    Objective 10
    220
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 94
    Vickie is comparing the cost of a DVD player at two different stores. The DVD player costs $ 119

    at Store A and $ 138 at Store B. Vickie has a 15% -off coupon for Store B, and Store A is having
    a 10% -off sale. Which statement best describes the difference in price of the DVD player at the
    two stores after discounts?
    A The DVD player costs $ 10.20 less at Store B than at Store A.

    B The DVD player costs $ 23.05 more at Store B than at Store A.
    C The DVD player costs $ 10.20 more at Store B than at Store A.
    D The DVD player costs $ 23.05 less at Store B than at Store A.

    Question 95
    Jessica is decorating a section of one wall of her kitchen with ceramic tiles. The area she is

    decorating is represented by the shaded area in the diagram below. She is using 3-inch square
    tiles. The tiles are sold in boxes of 100.

    How many boxes of tiles will Jessica need to cover that section of the wall?
    A 3
    B 1
    C 4
    D 2

    Question 96
    A small company that manufactures staplers estimates that c , the cost per day in dollars of

    producing n staplers, is given by the formula c 1.12 n 300, where $ 300 represents the
    xed costs associated with operating the shop for aday. By about what percent would the cost of
    producing 250 staplers increase if the company s xed costs increased by 15% ?

    A 15%
    B 8%
    C 18%
    D 6%

    Question 97
    Jessie and Philippe are on opposite ends of a road that is 5 miles long. Jessie is walking toward

    Philippe at 4 miles per hour, and Philippe is riding his bike toward Jessie at 6 miles per hour.
    In how many minutes will they meet each other?
    A 120 min
    B 50 min
    C 30 min
    D 2 min 1.5 ft 2.5 ft

    2 ft
    6 ft

    Answer Key: page 241

    Answer Key: page 241 Answer Key: page 242

    Answer Key: page 242 221
    221 Page 222 223
    Question 98
    A publisher wants to include in an art history book a reproduction of an original painting that

    measures 2 feet wide by 3 feet tall. The publisher has a space for the picture that is 8 inches wide
    and 9 inches high. By what scale factor must the original painting be reduced if it is to be as large
    as possible, and still t in the space available?
    A 1 7

    B 1 4
    C 4

    D 1 3

    Question 99
    As a candle burns, its height decreases. Matt s science class measured the height of a candle as

    it burned. They discovered that h , its height in inches, could be represented by the function
    h 12 0.1 m , where m equals the number of
    minutes the candle burns.

    Which of the following statements is not true?

    A There is a linear relationship between the candle s height and the number of minutes it
    burns.
    B The candle was 12 inches tall when it started burning.

    C The height of the candle is directly proportional to the number of minutes it
    burns.
    D The candle burned for at most 120 minutes.

    Question 100
    Which problem can be solved using the equation 3 x 40 100?

    A Carrie bought a pair of shoes for $ 40, a shirt, and a pair of pants that cost twice as much
    as the shirt. She spent a total of $ 100. What was the cost of the shirt?

    B The perimeter of a rectangle is 100 units. The length of the rectangle is 40 units more
    than three times the width. What is the width?

    C Alex deposited $ 100 at a 3% yearly interest rate. After how many years will he earn
    $ 40 in interest?
    D The student council spent $ 40 on cups with the school logo. The cups sell for $ 3 each.

    How many cups must the council sell to make a pro t of $ 100?

    Question 101
    Joyce has been given two linear functions,
    f ( x ) 2( x 3) 7 and g ( x ) 1 2 x 7. She wants
    to nd the values of x for which f ( x ) g ( x ) .
    Which of the following would be a reasonable
    strategy Joyce could use to solve the problem?

    A Write the two functions in slope-intercept form and compare their slopes.

    B Write the two functions in slope-intercept form and compare their intercepts.
    C Solve the inequality 2 x 1 1 2 x 7.
    D Graph the two functions and see which graph has a positive slope.

    Objective 10

    221
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 242

    Answer Key: page 243 Answer Key: page 243
    Answer Key: page 243 222
    222 Page 223 224
    Objective 10
    222
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 102
    The table below shows the graphs of three related quadratic functions.

    Which of the following is most likely the graph of y ( x 2) 2 ?

    y
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    y
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    y
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    y
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
    Function Graph

    y ( x 1) 2

    y ( x 3) 2
    y ( x 5) 2
    y

    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    y
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    y
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    3
    2
    1

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8

    x 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    Answer Key: page 243

    A
    B
    C
    D
    223
    223 Page 224 225
    Question 103
    Look at the pattern of the cylinders below.

    If the pattern continues, which of the following would be a correct step to nd the volume of the next cylinder in this series?
    A Increase the diameter and height of the previous cylinder by a scale factor of 1.5.
    B Increase the diameter and height of the previous cylinder by a scale factor of ( 1.5) 2 .
    C Increase the diameter and height of the previous cylinder by a scale factor of ( 1.5) 3 .
    D Increase the diameter and height of the previous cylinder by a scale factor of 1.5 .

    Question 104
    Andrew is keeping a record of the number of people who visit his website each week. His site had twice as many visitors the second week as the rst. The third week the site had 22 more visitors than

    the second week. The fourth week it had 2.5 times as many visitors as the rst week. If x represents the number of visitors the site had during the rst week, which expression could be used to nd the
    mean number of visitors?
    A x 2 x ( 2 x 22) 2.5 x
    B
    C
    x 2 x ( x 22) 2.5 x
    D x 2 x ( 2 x 22) 2.5( x 22) 4

    x 2 x ( 2 x 22) 2.5 x
    4

    Cylinder 1 Cylinder 2 Cylinder 3 Cylinder 4
    4 cm
    2 cm
    3 cm

    6 cm

    6.75 cm
    13.5 cm
    4.5 cm

    9 cm

    Objective 10

    223
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    Answer Key: page 244
    Answer Key: page 243 224
    224 Page 225 226
    Question 1 ( page 26)
    A
    Incorrect. The total salary she is paid for a week depends on the number of hours she works,

    which is the independent quantity.
    B Incorrect. Her hourly rate of pay, $ 5.50, is a constant.

    C Correct. The total salary she is paid for a week is the dependent quantity. It depends on the
    number of hours she works, which is the independent quantity. Her hourly rate of pay,
    $ 5.50, is a constant.
    D Incorrect. The number of days worked in a week is not a variable in this problem.

    Question 2 ( page 26)
    C
    Correct. The number of pretzels in the box, p , is determined by the volume of the box, V . Since

    p depends on the value of V , it is the dependent
    variable.

    Question 3 ( page 26)
    C
    Correct. The ordered pairs ( 1, 1) and ( 1, 16) both belong to the relationship represented in C. If

    this relationship were a function, each rst coordinate would be paired with exactly one
    second coordinate. In this choice the rst coordinate, 1, is paired with two different second
    coordinates, 1 and 16. Choice C is not a function.

    Question 4 ( page 26)
    B
    Correct. Check the ordered pairs in the table to see

    whether they satisfy the rule for the function.

    The function f ( x ) 2 x 2 2 x 1 correctly matches the dependent and independent
    quantities in the table.

    Question 5 ( page 27)
    D
    Correct. Jane s pro t is equal to the difference between the amount of money she collects and

    her expenses. The variable x stands for the number of pets she cares for. The amount she
    collects for caring for x pets is 25 x . Her expenses are $ 210. The difference, 25 x 210, represents
    her pro t. Therefore, the function f ( x ) 25 x 210 best represents her net pro t in terms of x , the
    number of pets she cares for.

    Question 6 ( page 27)
    A
    Correct. To nd the correct inequality, rst state the problem in words using the variable, the

    constants, and the relationship among them.
    The current volume, 75 decibels, plus the amount by which the volume is increased, q , must be less

    than 120 decibels, the level at which neighbors would complain.

    Substitute the appropriate symbols for the quantities in an inequality: 75 q 120.

    Question 7 ( page 27)
    B
    Correct. Check the ordered pairs in the table to see

    whether they satisfy the rule for the function.

    The ordered pairs in table B correctly represent
    the function f ( x ) 2 5 x 3.

    Objective 1
    Independent Rule Dependent Quantity f ( x ) 2 x 2 2 x 1 Quantity
    f ( 0) 2 0 2 2 0 1
    0 f ( 0) 0 0 11 f ( 0) 1

    f ( 1) 2 1 2 2 1 1
    1 f ( 1) 2 2 15 f ( 1) 5

    f ( 2) 2 2 2 2 2 1
    2 f ( 2) 8 4 113 f ( 2) 13

    f ( 3) 2 3 2 2 3 1
    3 f ( 3) 18 6 125 f ( 3) 25

    224

    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I

The K-12 TLC Guide to
Grade 10 TAKS
Mathematics

Teacher Resources
    CS Mathematics Answer Key

    Independent Rule Dependent
    Quantity f ( x ) 2 5 x 3 Quantity

    f ( 10) 2 5 ( 10) 3
    10 f ( 10) 4 3 7
    f ( 10) 7

    f ( 0) 2 5 ( 0) 3
    0 f ( 0) 0 3 3
    f ( 0) 3

    f ( 10) 2 5 ( 10) 3
    10 f ( 10) 4 31
    f ( 10) 1

    f ( 20) 2 5 ( 20) 3
    20 f ( 20) 8 35
    f ( 20) 5 225
    225 Page 226 227
    225
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Question 8 ( page 28)
    C
    Correct. To verify that a graph represents a function, nd

    the coordinates of several points on the graph and substitute them into the rule for the
    function.
    For example, ( 0, 9) is a point on the graph in choice C.

    If x is replaced with 0 and y is replaced with 9, is the functional rule satis ed? In other words,
    does f ( x ) 9 when x 0?
    f ( 0) x 2 9
    f ( 0) 0 9
    f ( 0) 9
    Yes, the point ( 0, 9) is an ordered pair in the function f ( x ) x 2 9.

    In the same way, check any other points on the graph. All the points on the graph in choice C
    satisfy the function f ( x ) x 2 9.
    The graph in choice C correctly represents the function f ( x ) x 2 9.

    Question 9 ( page 29)
    A
    Incorrect. The graph must start at 35 grams, not 0 grams, to account for the mass of the beaker.

    B Incorrect. The mass of the beaker increases at a constant rate. A constant rate of increase is a
    linear function. The graph in choice B is not linear.
    C Correct. The graph starts at 35 grams, which is the mass of the empty beaker. The mass increases

    at a constant rate. A constant rate of increase is a linear function. The graph increases and is a
    line. The graph ends at 50 grams of water added and a total mass of 85 grams. The graph in
    choice C best represents the combined mass of the beaker and the water as the amount of water
    in the beaker increases.
    D Incorrect. The graph starts at 35 grams, which is correct. The graph ends at 10 grams of water

    added and a total mass of 85 grams. This is not the correct amount added to obtain a total mass
    of 85 grams. This graph cannot be correct.

    Question 10 ( page 30)
    D
    Correct. The number of chocolate chip cookies sold is described in terms of the number of

    peanut butter cookies sold. Therefore, an ordered pair belonging to the function should list the
    number of peanut butter cookies sold as the x -coordinate and the number of chocolate chip
    cookies sold as the y -coordinate. Find several ordered pairs belonging to the function and then
    see which graph includes these ordered pairs. The second coordinate should be twice the rst
    coordinate. Ordered pairs such as ( 1, 2) , ( 2, 4) , and ( 5, 10) belong to this function. Only the
    graph in choice D contains ordered pairs that t this pattern.

    Question 11 ( page 31)
    A
    Correct. The class begins to make a pro t when the accumulated sales exceed the expenses. To

    nd this point, draw a dashed line extending horizontally through $ 1025 on the vertical axis.

    Notice that the values on the vertical axis are in hundreds of dollars, so the dashed line
    representing $ 1025 should be just above the 10 mark on the vertical scale ( since 10 100
    1000) . The line crosses the graph between Day 4 and Day 5. Thus, part of the sales on Day 5 were
    used to meet expenses, but the remaining sales that day were the pro t.

    910111213 0
    2
    4
    6
    8
    10
    12
    14
    16
    18
    20
    22

    1 2 3 4 5 6 78
    Days

    Total Sales
    ( hundreds
    of dollars)

    Mathematics Answer Key 226
    226 Page 227 228
    Mathematics Answer Key
    226
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 12 ( page 31)
    D
    Correct. The horizontal scale of the graph represents temperature. Draw a vertical dashed

    line at 42 ° C to see where the line intersects the graph.

    Read the corresponding value on the vertical axis, which is about 68 grams.
    Question 13 ( page 32)
    C
    Correct. Evaluate each of the formulas for 1,450 ft 2 and

    compare the results.

    The least expensive community in which to build a 1,450 ft 2 home would be Community R.

    Question 14 ( page 59)
    B
    Correct. The graph is a parabola. Its parent function is the quadratic parent function, y x 2 ,

    whose graph is also a parabola.

    Question 15 ( page 59)
    B
    Correct. The value of the account, v , depends on the number of years the money is in the bank, t .

    Therefore, v is the dependent variable. The range is the set of possible values for the dependent
    variable. The amount of money in the bank begins at $ 550 and increases each year thereafter. The
    minimum value for v is $ 550, but it has no upper limit. The range of the function is any value for v
    that is equal to or greater than $ 550, or v 550.

    Question 16 ( page 59)
    A
    Incorrect. The speed would be very slow at the top of the track and would increase as the roller

    coaster approached the bottom. The speed would then decrease as the roller coaster climbed back
    up the track. The graph, however, decreases and then increases. The graph does not match the
    description of the roller coaster s motion.
    B Incorrect. The price of a stock, the dependent quantity in choice B, decreases and then

    increases like the graph, but the stock price decreases to only half its original value, not to 0.
    The line of the graph falls to 0, so it does not match this description.

    C Correct. The bullet starts at a very high speed. It slows as it goes straight up until it reaches a
    maximum height, when its speed falls to 0. The bullet s speed then increases as it falls back to
    Earth. The graph decreases and increases in the same fashion. The graph matches this
    description.
    D Incorrect. The race car must start from a speed of 0. Its speed would build to a maximum and stay

    near that speed for several laps. The speed of the race car would then go back to 0 for the fuel stop.
    The graph does not match this description.

    Question 17 ( page 60)
    C
    Correct. When there is a negative correlation between two quantities, one variable increases as

    Objective 2
    90 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
    Temperature of Water
    ( ° C)

    Solubility
    of
    Potassium

    Nitrate

    ( g/
    100

    cm
    3
    )

    0
    20
    40
    60
    80

    100
    120
    140
    130

    110
    90
    70
    50

    30
    10

    Community Cost of Building Evaluated for f 1,450 a New Home
    c 15,000 80( 1,450)
    R c 15,000 80 f c 15,000 116,000
    c 131,000

    c 25,000 75( 1,450)
    S c 25,000 75 f c 25,000 108,750
    c 133,750

    c 60,000 50( 1,450)
    T c 60,000 50 f c 60,000 72,500
    c 132,500

    c 40,000 65( 1,450)
    V c 40,000 65 f c 40,000 94,250
    c 134,250 227
    227 Page 228 229
    the other decreases. In this case, as time increases, the number of gallons of gasoline in the
    boat decreases. There is a negative correlation between the number of gallons of gasoline
    remaining in the boat and the number of hours that have passed.

    Question 18 ( page 60)
    A
    Correct. The number of customers increases by 6 each day, and the amount of sales increases by

    $ 30. Continue the sequence until the amount of sales reaches $ 330. It will take 2 more days
    because 270 30 30 330. The number of customers corresponding to this sales amount
    would be an increase of 6 per day for 2 days, or 30 6 6 42 customers.

    Question 19 ( page 61)
    D
    Correct. The volume of a rectangular prism ( the refrigerator s shape) is equal to its length times

    its width times its height. If x represents the depth, or length, of the refrigerator, then 1.75 x
    represents its width. The height of the refrigerator is 6 feet.

    V lwh
    V x
    1.75 x 6
    V ( 1.75 6) ( x x )
    V 10.5 x 2

    Question 20 ( page 61)
    C
    Correct. Look for a pattern in the ordered pairs. The

    function appears to satisfy the rule that a term in the sequence is equal to twice its square, f ( x )
    2 x 2 . See whether each term satis es this rule.

    Each ordered pair satis es the rule f ( x ) 2 x 2 .

    Question 21 ( page 61)
    C
    Correct. One way to nd the relationship between the terms in a sequence and their

    position in the sequence is to build a table.
    Sequence 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . .

    Test the values in the table against the rule in choice C. For example, the rule in choice C says
    that the third term in the sequence should be 2 n 1 2 3 1, or 5. When n 3, the rule
    gives the correct term in the sequence. In the same way, the rule 2 n 1 predicts each of the
    other values in the sequence.

    Question 22 ( page 62)
    The correct answer is 6004. Use the functional
    rule, P ( x ) 1 2 x 2, to nd the minimum number
    of loaves of bread Mr. Jones must sell to produce a pro t of $ 3000.

    1 2 x 2 3000
    1 2 x 3002

    x 6004
    Mr. Jones must sell at least 6004 loaves of bread to have a pro t of at least $ 3000.

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    60 4 0

    Mathematics Answer Key

    227
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS

    xf ( x ) 2 x 2 f ( x )
    2  2 1 2 12  2 12

    2 2
    8  2 2 2 28  2 48

    8 8
    18  2 3 2 318  2 918

    18 18
    32  2 4 2 432  2 16 32

    32 32

    Position ( n ) Value
    11
    23
    35
    47
    59 228
    228 Page 229 230
    Mathematics Answer Key
    228
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 23 ( page 62)
    C
    Correct. To nd an equivalent expression, simplify the given expression by removing

    parentheses and combining like terms.
    2 x 2( 3 x 4) 3( 8 x 4)
    2 x ( 6 x 8) ( 24 x 12)
    ( 2 x 6 x 24 x ) ( 8 12)
    32 x 20

    Question 24 ( page 89)
    A
    Incorrect. The formula for the area of a circle, A
    r 2 , involves a squared term, r 2 . It is not a linear function.

    B Correct. The formula for the perimeter of an equilateral triangle in terms of its side, s , is
    P 3 s . All variables are to the rst power, so
    this is a linear function.

    C Incorrect. The surface area of a cube with side length s is given by the formula A 6 s 2 . The

    function involves a squared term, s 2 . It is not a linear function.

    D Incorrect. The formula for the volume of a cylinder with radius r and height h is V
    r 2 h . The function involves the product of two

    independent variables, r and h , and includes a variable raised to the second power. It is not a
    linear function.

    Question 25 ( page 89)
    B
    Correct. One way to match the equation to its graph is to

    write the equation 2 y x 10 in slope-intercept form, y mx b .

    2 y x 10
    2 y x 10
    y 1 2 x 5

    In this form the slope, m , is 1 2 , and the y -intercept,
    b , is 5. Only the graph in choice B has a slope of 1 2
    and a y -intercept of 5.

    Question 26 ( page 90)
    A
    Incorrect. The rate of change is the slope of the line graphed.

    Slope 3 4 ( 1 1) 2 3
    The graph represents a rate of change of 2 3 .
    B Incorrect. To nd the slope of the line, write the
    equation in slope-intercept form, y mx b .
    The equation becomes y 2 3 x 4, so the slope is 2

    3 . The equation represents a rate of change of 2
    3 .
    C Correct. To nd the rate of change represented in the table, compare the difference between any

    two y -values to the corresponding difference in x -values. For example, use the two points ( 1, 4)
    and ( 3, 10) .
    Rate of change 10 3 4 1 6 4 3 2
    The table does not represent a rate of change of 2 3 .
    D Incorrect. The equation is already in slope-intercept
    form, y mx b . The value of m is 2 3 .
    Therefore, the slope is 2 3 . The equation represents
    a rate of change of 2 3 .

    Question 27 ( page 90)
    B
    Correct. To nd the maximum number of grams of potatoes, look at the point on the graph where

    the number of grams of beef equals zero, the x -intercept. The graph crosses the x -axis at the
    point ( 450, 0) . Therefore, the maximum number of grams of potatoes that you could eat to obtain
    500 calories is 450 grams.

    Question 28 ( page 91)
    C
    Correct. The y -intercept is ( 0, 200) . The y -coordinate, 200, represents 200 units on

    the y -axis. The units on the y -axis are thousands of dollars. The company s initial assets are
    200 $ 1,000 $ 200,000.
    The slope, or rate of growth, is 50 units in the
    y direction for every unit in the x direction. Thus,
    the slope is 1 50 , or 50. The y -axis units are
    thousands of dollars, and the x -axis units are years. The expected growth rate is $ 50,000 per year.

    Objective 3 229
    229 Page 230 231
    Mathematics Answer Key
    229
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Question 29 ( page 91)
    B
    Correct. To nd the slope of the graph of the given

    equation, 8 x 2 y 10, write it in slope-intercept form, y mx b . Solve for y by subtracting 8 x
    from both sides of the equation and then dividing both sides by 2. The transformed equation is
    y 4 x 5. This form shows that the value of
    m is 4. The slope of the given equation is 4.

    Identify the answer choice whose graph has a slope equal to 4 and a y -intercept equal to 8. To

    nd the slope and y -intercept of the line in choice B, solve for y . The equation 4 x y 8 is
    equivalent to the equation y 4 x 8. This line has a slope of 4 and a y -intercept of 8. It is the
    only answer choice that meets both requirements.

    Question 30 ( page 91)
    A
    Correct. Both graphs are lines. To determine their

    relationship, compare the slope of each graph.
    The rst equation, y 3 4 x 4, is written in
    slope-intercept form, y mx b . Its slope is
    the value of m , or 3 4 . The second equation has a
    slope of 1. Since 1 3 4 , the slope of the second
    line is greater than that of the rst line. Therefore,
    the second line is steeper than the rst line.

    Question 31 ( page 91)
    D
    Correct. Use the slope formula to nd the slope of the line

    that passes through the two points ( 2, 5) and ( 4, 3) .
    m 2 5 4 3 8 2 4
    The slope of the line is 4.
    Substitute 4 for m and the coordinates of the point ( 2, 5) for x and y in the slope-intercept

    form of the equation of a line.
    y mx b
    5 4 2 b
    5 8 b
    b
    13
    Substituting m 4 and b 13 into the slope-intercept form of the equation of a line

    results in y 4 x 13. The equation y 4 x 13 is equivalent to the equation in choice D.
    y 4 x 13
    4 x 4 x
    4 x y 13

    Question 32 ( page 91)
    D
    Correct. One way to nd the two intercepts is to write the

    equation in standard form, Ax By C . Then replace x with 0 to determine the y -intercept and
    replace y with 0 to determine the x -intercept.
    The equation 2 x 9 3 y in standard form is 2 x 3 y 9. Let y 0.

    2 x 3 0 9
    2 x 9

    x 9 2

    The x -intercept is 9 2 . The coordinates of the
    x -intercept are ( 9 2 , 0) .
    In the same way, let x 0.
    2 0 3 y 9
    3 y 9
    y 3
    The y -intercept is 3. The coordinates of the y -intercept are ( 0, 3) .

    Question 33 ( page 92)
    A
    Correct. The slopes of the lines represent their rate of change, the price per cookie. The slopes

    of the two lines are equal, so the price per additional cookie remained the same. The rst
    graph contains the point ( 12, 6) , and the second graph contains the point ( 12, 7) . The cost of the
    rst dozen cookies increased from $ 6 to $ 7.

    Question 34 ( page 92)
    A
    Correct. The number of miles Sammie walks is directly proportional to the number of minutes

    she walks. Write a direct-proportion equation.
    y kx 230
    230 Page 231 232
    Mathematics Answer Key
    230
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    In this equation, y is the number of miles and x is the number of minutes. She walks 3 miles in
    45 minutes. Substitute and solve for k , the proportionality constant.

    y kx
    3 k 45

    4 3 5
    k
    4

    5 45

    k 1 1 5

    The constant of proportionality is 1 1 5 .
    The equation describing this situation is

    y 1 1 5 x . Find the number of miles walked in
    2.5 hours. Convert 2.5 hours to minutes so that
    the units are the same.
    2.5 hours 60 minutes per hour 150 minutes.
    Substitute 150 for x in the equation y 1 1 5 x .
    Solve the equation for y .

    y 1 1 5 150
    y 10
    At this rate Sammie would walk 10 miles in 2.5 hours.

    Question 35 ( page 106)
    C
    Correct. This is a problem about the perimeter of a rectangle. The width of the rectangle is given

    as w . The length will be ve feet more than the width, so the length can be represented by w 5.
    The formula for the perimeter of a rectangle is P 2 w 2 l . The perimeter of the rectangle can be
    represented by the equation P 2 w 2( w 5) .
    She can afford 150 feet of fencing. The perimeter must be less than or equal to 150 feet. Use the

    symbol to write an inequality expressing this relationship.

    P 150
    2 w 2( w 5) 150

    Question 36 ( page 106)
    C
    Correct. Let m represent the amount of money she spent on movie rentals, c the cost of her car

    repairs, and l the cost of her lunches. Since Sharon spent ve times as much on car repairs,
    c , as she did on movie rentals, m , you can write
    the equation c 5 m . Since she spent $ 4 less on

    lunches, l , than on movie rentals, m , you can write the equation l m 4.
    The sum of these expenses is $ 80, so m c l 80.
    Substitute the expressions in terms of m for c and l and solve for m .
    m c l 80
    m 5 m m 4 80
    ( m 5 m m ) 4 80
    7 m 4 80
    7 m 84
    m 12
    Sharon spent $ 12 on movie rentals. The question asks how much her car repairs cost. Since

    c 5 m , her car expenses were 5 12 $ 60.

    Question 37 ( page 106)
    A
    Correct. Represent the rst number with x and the second number with y .

    If the sum of the two numbers is 59, then x y 59.
    If the difference between 2 times the rst number, x , and 6 times the second number, y , is
    34, then 2 x 6 y 34.
    Solve the system of equations.
    x y 59
    2 x 6 y 34
    Addition method: Multiply the rst equation by 6 to obtain two terms with opposite coef cients,

    6 and 6.
    6 x 6 y 354
    2 x 6 y 34
    Add the two equations to obtain one equation with one unknown.

    8 x 320
    x 40
    If x 40, then substitute 40 into the rst equation to nd y .

    x y 59
    40 y 59
    y 19
    The rst number is 40, and the second number is 19.

    Substitution method: Solve the rst equation for y .
    y 59 x
    Substitute ( 59 x ) for y in the second equation.

    Objective 4 231
    231 Page 232 233
    Mathematics Answer Key
    231
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    2 x 6 y 34
    2 x 6( 59 x ) 34
    2 x 354 6 x 34
    8 x 354 34
    8 x 320
    x 40
    If x 40, then substitute 40 into the rst equation, x y 59, to nd y .

    y 19
    The rst number is 40, and the second number is 19.

    Question 38 ( page 106)
    C
    Correct. If Sid made 125 plain bagels and 25 garlic bagels, it would be represented by the

    point ( 25, 125) . On the graph, the point ( 25, 125) is not in the shaded region that represents the
    solution to this inequality.

    Question 39 ( page 107)
    D
    Correct. Let w the width of the kennel. Ira must fence two widths plus the length of the

    garage. The total number of feet of fencing Ira will use is w w 20 2 w 20. The total cost
    of materials can be represented by the number of feet of fencing times the cost per foot of the
    materials, 4( 2 w 20) . If Ira has at most $ 120 to spend on the project, then the inequality
    4( 2 w 20) 120 can be used to solve the problem.

    4( 2 w 20) 120
    8 w 80 120
    8 w 40
    w 5
    The kennel can be at most 5 feet wide.

    Question 40 ( page 107)
    C
    Correct. Write the two equations in slope-intercept form, y mx b .

    3 x 2 y 14 6 x 2 y 32
    2 y 3 x 14 2 y 6 x 32

    2
    2y
    2
    3x 14
    2 2
    2y
    2
    6x 32
    2

    y 3 2 x 7 y 3 x 16

    The slope of the graph of the rst equation is 3 2 ,
    and the slope of the graph of the second equation is 3. The y -intercept of the rst equation is ( 0, 7) ,

    and the y -intercept of the second equation is ( 0, 16) . Since the slopes are different, the graphs
    will be a pair of intersecting lines. The single point at which the lines intersect represents the
    one solution.

    Question 41 ( page 107)
    A
    Correct. The cost of an adult ticket, a , is twice as much as the cost of a child ticket, c . Therefore,

    a 2 c . Sandra bought 3 adult tickets and 5 child
    tickets. The total cost of the tickets, $ 48.40, is equal to 3 times a , the cost of an adult ticket,

    plus 5 times c , the cost of a child ticket. So 3 a 5 c 48.40. To nd the cost of each ticket,
    solve the following system of equations.
    a 2 c
    3 a 5 c 48.40
    Use the substitution method because the rst equation is already solved for a .

    Substitute the expression 2 c for a in the second equation and solve.
    3 a 5 c 48.40
    3( 2 c ) 5 c 48.40
    6 c 5 c 48.40
    11 c 48.40
    c 4.40
    Since a 2 c , the cost of an adult ticket, a , is 2( $ 4.40) $ 8.80. The cost of an adult ticket

    is $ 8.80, and the cost of a child ticket is $ 4.40.

    Question 42 ( page 107)
    A
    Correct. The store s pro t is given in the equation p 0.25( s 3000) . Substitute the greatest and

    least projected values for the monthly sales, s , to nd the expected range of values for the pro t, p .

    Solve both inequalities to nd the possible range of values for p .
    p 0.25( s 3000) p 0.25( s 3000)
    p 0.25( 5000 3000) p 0.25( 7000 3000)
    p 0.25( 2000) p 0.25( 4000)
    p 500 p 1000
    This means that p 500 and p 1000, or 500 p 1000. 232
    232 Page 233 234
    Question 43 ( page 108)
    C
    Correct. The solution can be represented by graphing the inequality and identifying points in

    the shaded region.

    Only the point ( 20, 50) is not in the shaded region of the graph.
    If Brent sold 20 cans of popcorn, he would have raised 20 $ 5 $ 100. And 50 candy bars would
    have raised 50 $ 2 $ 100. He would have raised only $ 200 in all, not more than $ 300.

    Question 44 ( page 108)
    D
    Correct. In general, the total cost of staying at the resort is equal to the cost of a night, n , times

    the number of nights, plus the cost of a meal, m , times the number of meals.

    If a guest stays 2 nights and has 5 meals, it costs $ 395. Represented by an equation in terms of
    n and m , this is 2 n 5 m 395.
    If a guest stays 5 nights and has 11 meals, it costs $ 959. Represented by an equation in terms

    of n and m , this is 5 n 11 m 959.

    Question 45 ( page 108)
    D
    Correct. The total number of watermelons and cantaloupes bought is 13.

    The number of watermelons, w , plus the number of cantaloupes, c , is 13.
    w c 13
    The total amount spent on watermelons is equal to $ 2 times w , the number of watermelons, or 2 w .

    The total amount spent on cantaloupes is equal to $ 1 times c , the number of cantaloupes, or 1 c .

    The total amount spent on watermelons and cantaloupes, $ 20, is equal to the sum of these two
    amounts.
    2 w c 20

    Question 46 ( page 130)
    C
    Correct. Multiplying the coef cient of x 2 by 2 in the

    equation y 2 x 2 changes the equation to y 4 x 2 . Compare the absolute values of the
    coef cients. The absolute value of the coef cient in the new equation is larger than in the old
    equation. This increase causes the graph to appear narrower.

    Question 47 ( page 130)
    B
    Correct. The value of the parameter a in the function

    y 1 2 x 2 is 1 2 . The value of a in the function
    y 1 2 x 2 is 1 2 . Changing the sign of a causes
    the graph to be re ected across the x -axis.
    The two graphs are congruent. y

    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y = x 2 1 2

    y = x 2 1 2

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    y = 4 x 2
    y = 2 x 2

    Objective 5
    0
    20
    40
    60
    80
    100
    120
    140

    10 20 30 40 50 60
    Candy
    Bars

    Popcorn
    x

    y
    ( 60, 0)
    ( 0, 150)
    Mathematics Answer Key

    232
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS 233
    233 Page 234 235
    Mathematics Answer Key
    233
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Question 48 ( page 130)
    D
    Correct. The vertex of the graph of y x 2 6 is 6 units

    above the origin, and the vertex of the graph of y x 2 1is 1 unit below the origin. The vertex
    of y x 2 6 is 7 units above the vertex of y x 2 1.

    Question 49 ( page 131)
    D
    Correct. As the selling price increases, the pro t increases until it reaches a maximum; after the

    maximum pro t is reached, the pro t decreases as the selling price continues to increase. A
    selling price that is neither too high nor too low produces the best pro t.

    Question 50 ( page 132)
    A
    Incorrect. The horizontal axis represents time, not distance.

    B Incorrect. The horizontal axis represents time, not distance. The interpretation of the graph as
    the path of the stone is not correct. In this instance, the path of the stone is not a curving
    path, but a vertical line.
    C Correct. The horizontal axis of the graph represents time in seconds from the time the

    stone is dropped. The stone s distance from the ground is 0 feet when the graph crosses the
    horizontal axis. The graph crosses this axis between 5 and 6, so the stone hits the ground
    between 5 and 6 seconds after it is dropped.
    D Incorrect. The stone s distance from the ground does not decrease at a constant rate. If the

    distance decreased at a constant rate, the graph would be linear, not curved.

    Question 51 ( page 133)
    B
    Correct. The roots of a function are the values of the

    independent variable, x , for which the dependent variable, y , is 0. The roots of the function can be
    seen by examining the table. There are two ordered pairs in the table that have 0 values for
    y : ( 0, 0) and ( 4, 0) . The x -values for these ordered
    pairs are 0 and 4.

    Question 52 ( page 133)
    A
    Correct. Write the equation 2 x 2 3 x 9 in standard

    form, 2 x 2 3 x 9 0. The quadratic expression 2 x 2 3 x 9 is factorable.

    Factor the expression and rewrite the equation.
    ( 2 x 3) ( x 3) 0
    One way to solve this equation is to set each factor equal to 0.

    2 x 3 0 x 3 0
    2 x 3 x 3

    x 3 2

    The solutions are x 3 2 and x 3.

    Question 53 ( page 133)
    D
    Correct. In the equation x 2 4 x 5 0, replace x rst

    with 1 and then with 5 to see whether the equation is true.

    Substitute x 1 Substitute x 5
    x 2 4 x 5 0 x 2 4 x 5 0
    ( 1) 2 4 1 5  0 ( 5) 2 4 5 5  0
    1 4 5  025 20 5  0
    0 00 0
    Both replacements make this equation true. Only the equation in choice D has 1 and 5 as

    solutions.

    y
    x
    4
    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    12
    13
    14

    15

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
    y = x 2 + 6
    y = x 2 1 234
    234 Page 235 236
    Mathematics Answer Key
    234
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 54 ( page 134)
    A
    Correct. Use the quadratic formula to determine the roots

    of the equation. Substitute a 1, b 4, and c 2 into the quadratic formula.

    The following result is obtained.

    Since 8 2.8, substitute this value in the formula.
    4 2 2.8 3.4 4 2 2.8 0.6
    The roots of the equation are approximately 3.4 and 0.6, with 0.6 being the smaller root.
    The number 0.6 lies between the integers 0 and 1.

    Question 55 ( page 134)
    D
    Correct. Substitute the given expression for the radius into the formula for volume of a sphere.

    V 4 3 ( 3 x 2 y ) 3
    Following the order of operations, rst simplify the expression for the radius cubed, ( 3 x 2 y ) 3 . When

    raising a term with an exponent to a power, multiply the exponents.

    V 4 3 ( 3 x 2 y ) 3
    V 4 3 3 3 x 2 3 y 3
    V 4 3 27 x 6 y 3
    V 36 x 6 y 3

    Question 56 ( page 147)
    C
    Correct. Use the graph to nd the coordinates of the triangle: A ( 0, 2) , B ( 2, 2) , and C ( 3, 2) .

    The length of side AC is 3 0 3, and the length of side A C is 6 0 6. The ratio of
    these lengths is 6 3 2, which is the given dilation

    factor. Only the triangle in choice C has its side lengths in a 2: 1 ratio to those of the original
    triangle.

    Question 57 ( page 148)
    A
    Correct. The side lengths of the original rectangle and the dilated rectangle are as follows:

    RS TV 3, ST RV 6, R S T V 1,
    and S T R V 2.

    To nd the scale factor, choose one pair of corresponding sides.

    Find the ratio of the side length of the dilated gure to that of the original gure.

    R V
    RV
    2 6 1 3

    The side length of the dilated gure is 1 3 the
    side length of the original gure. The scale
    factor is 1 3 .

    Question 58 ( page 148)
    A
    Incorrect. If one triangle is a dilation of the other, then the two triangles are similar. The lengths of

    the corresponding sides of similar triangles must be in equal ratios.

    1
    1 1 3
    1. 5 1
    2
    2
    4
    1
    2

    The ratios are not all equal.
    B Incorrect. If one triangle is a dilation of the other, then the two triangles are similar. The lengths of

    the corresponding sides of similar triangles must be in equal ratios.

    1
    2
    1
    2 4
    1. 5 3
    8
    2
    6
    1
    3

    The ratios are not all equal.
    C Incorrect. If one triangle is a dilation of the other, then the two triangles are similar. The lengths of

    the corresponding sides of similar triangles must be in equal ratios.

    1
    4
    1
    4
    1.
    4.
    5
    5
    3
    9
    1
    3
    2
    5
    2
    5

    The ratios are not all equal.
    D Correct. If one triangle is a dilation of the other, then the two triangles are similar. The lengths of

    the corresponding sides of similar triangles must be in equal ratios. Only the side lengths in choice
    Dform a proportion with the given sides.
    1
    4
    1
    4 6
    1. 5 3
    12
    1
    4
    2
    8
    1
    4

    Objective 6

    4 8 2
    4 16 8 2

    ( 4) ( 4) 2 4 1 2 2 1

    b b 2 4 ac
    2 a 235
    235 Page 236 237
    Mathematics Answer Key
    235
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Question 59 ( page 148)
    A
    Correct. The point ( 5, 6) in the given pentagon is 5 units to the right of the y -axis. The point ( 5, 6)

    is 5 units to the left of the y -axis. The point ( 5, 6) is the re ection of the point ( 5, 6) across the y -axis.

    The point ( 4, 1) in the given pentagon is 4 units to the right of the y -axis. The point ( 4, 1) is 4 units
    to the left of the y -axis. The point ( 4, 1) is the re ection of the point ( 4, 1) across the y -axis.

    The point ( 3, 5) in the given pentagon is 3 units to the right of the y -axis. The point ( 3, 5) is 3 units
    to the left of the y -axis. The point ( 3, 5) is the re ection of the point ( 3, 5) across the y -axis.

    Question 60 ( page 148)
    D
    Correct. After a translation of 2 units to the right and 3 units down, 2 is added to the x -coordinate

    of each point, and 3 is subtracted from the y -coordinate of each point.

    Point R ( 1, 1) of the original quadrilateral has coordinates of x 1 and y 1. Under a
    translation of 2 units to the right, its x -coordinate will be ( 1 2) 3. Under a
    translation of 3 units down, its y -coordinate will be ( 1 3) 2.

    Point R will have coordinates ( 3, 2) .
    Point T ( 5, 8) of the original quadrilateral has coordinates of x 5 and y 8. Under a

    translation of 2 units to the right, its x -coordinate will be ( 5 2) 7. Under a
    translation of 3 units down, its y -coordinate will be ( 8 3) 5.

    Point T will have coordinates ( 7, 5) .

    Question 61 ( page 149)
    C
    Correct. The scale factor of the dilation is greater than 1. The gure will be enlarged.

    The ratios of the lengths of corresponding sides
    should be 2 1 .

    Compare sides LM and L M since they are vertical.

    L ( 3, 4) , M ( 3, 6) , L ( 6, 8) , M ( 6, 12)
    Segment LM is vertical and has a length of 6 4 2.

    Segment L M is vertical and has a length of 12 8 4.

    The side lengths are in the ratio of 2 1 .

    Only choice C has all the corresponding side lengths in this ratio.
    Question 62 ( page 149)
    D
    Correct. The midpoint of a line segment is found by averaging the x -coordinates and averaging the

    y -coordinates.
    M ( 3 2 3 , 7 2 ( 5) ) ( 0 2 , 2 12 ) ( 0, 6)

    Question 63 ( page 150)
    A
    Incorrect. The coordinates of point R are ( 3, 2) .
    The x -coordinate of point R is 3. Since 3 3 2 ,
    point R does not meet the requirement that 7

    2 x 2 3 . B Incorrect. The coordinates of point S are ( 4, 3) .

    The x -coordinate of point S is 4. Since 4 7 2 ,
    point S does not meet the requirement that 7

    2 x 3 2 . C Correct. The coordinates of point T are ( 2, 3) .

    The x -coordinate of point T is 2.
    2 7 2 and 2 3 2
    Thus, 7 2 2 3 2 . Only the x -coordinate of
    point T satis es both of the given inequalities.
    D Incorrect. The coordinates of point U are ( 4, 2) .
    The x -coordinate of point U is 4. Since 4 3 2 ,
    point U does not meet the requirement that 7

    2 x 3 2 .

    y
    x
    5
    4

    6
    7
    8

    9

    3
    2
    1
    0

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5
    6

    7
    8
    9

    1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
    R ( 3, 7)
    S ( 3, 5)
    M ( 0, 6) 236
    236 Page 237 238
    Mathematics Answer Key
    236
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 64 ( page 150)
    D
    Correct. To translate a point 2 units to the right, add 2 to its x -coordinate. The x -coordinate of the

    point ( m , 2 n ) is m . The x -coordinate of the translated point is 2 larger than m , or m 2.
    The y -coordinate of the point is unaffected by a translation 2 units to the right. The y -coordinate
    of the point remains 2 n . The coordinates of the translated point are ( m 2, 2 n ) .

    Question 65 ( page 150)
    C
    Correct. The x -coordinate of the given point is 8

    3 2 2 3 . The point should be between 2 and 3 on
    the x -axis. The x -coordinates of points M and N are

    between 2 and 3. The y -coordinate of the given
    point is 9 5 1 4 5 . The point should be between
    1 and 2 on the y -axis. The y -coordinates of
    points L and N are between 1 and 2. Only
    point N has both the correct x -and y -coordinates.

    Question 66 ( page 158)
    A
    Incorrect. This is the top view of the object.
    B Incorrect. This is the front view of the object.
    C Correct. This is not a top, front, or side view of the object.

    D Incorrect. This is the right-side view of the object.

    Question 67 ( page 159)
    A
    Incorrect. This is the front view of the object.
    B Incorrect. This is the right-side view of the object.
    C Correct. This is the top view of the object.
    D Incorrect. This view looks somewhat like the top view of the object, but it does not show

    enough squares.

    Question 68 ( page 159)
    D
    Correct. Use the formula for the area of a rectangle to

    nd the areas of the two panels she painted.
    10 ft 20 ft 200 ft 2
    4 ft 15 ft 60 ft 2

    Find their sum.
    200 60 260 ft 2
    Then subtract their sum from 400 to nd the number of square feet that the paint left in the

    can will cover.
    400 ft 2 260 ft 2 140 ft 2
    The remaining paint will cover at most 140 ft 2 . Only the rectangle in answer choice D has an

    area that is less than or equal to 140 ft 2 because 10 12 120, and 120 140.

    Question 69 ( page 160)
    C
    Correct. If the three lengths are to form the sides of

    a right triangle, then they must satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem, a 2 b 2 c 2 .

    The greatest number in the set is 16. The hypotenuse of a right triangle is the longest side.
    Let c 16. The lesser numbers are 8 and 15. Let a 8 and b 15.

    Does 8 2 15 2 16 2 ?
    Does 64 225 256?
    No, because 64 225 289. Since 289 256, the set of numbers 8, 15, and 16 could not be the

    sides of a right triangle.

    Question 70 ( page 160)
    The correct answer is 10. Use a proportion to nd the answer.

    4 1 in 8 c f h t es x 4 in 5 ch ft es
    1 4 8 4 x 5

    18 x 4 45
    18 x 180
    x 10
    The longer side of the scale drawing is 10 inches.

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0 1

    Objective 7 237
    237 Page 238 239
    Mathematics Answer Key
    237
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Question 71 ( page 161)
    B
    Correct. Since the tiles are in square inches, nd all areas

    in square inches.
    The area of the countertop is its length times its width.

    A lw
    A
    5 ft 4 in. 2 ft 2 in.
    A 64 in. 26 in.
    A 1664 in. 2
    The area of the circular sink equals times its radius squared.

    A r 2
    A 8 2
    A 64
    A 201 in. 2
    The area of the countertop, not including the sink, is equal to the area of the rectangular top

    minus the area of the circular sink.
    1664 201 1463 in. 2
    Each tile is 2 in. by 2 in. , so it has an area of 2 2 4 in. 2 .

    Divide 1463 by 4 to nd the number of tiles needed.
    1463 4 365.75
    Ed will need at least 366 tiles.

    Question 72 ( page 161)
    B
    Correct. The set of squares in answer choice B shows that the triangle is a right triangle. The

    largest square has a side length of 5 units and an area of 25 square units. The other two squares
    have side lengths of 3 units and 4 units. They have areas of 9 square units and 16 square units,
    respectively.
    If 25 9 16, then 5 2 3 2 4 2 . This triangle shows that the sum of the squares of the legs

    equals the square of the hypotenuse. This model demonstrates the Pythagorean Theorem.

    Question 73 ( page 180)
    B
    Correct. To calculate the total surface area using a net,

    add the areas of all the surfaces.

    The rectangle forms the curved surface of the cylinder. The length of the rectangle is equal to
    the circumference of the circular base.
    C d
    C
    5
    C 15.7
    The rectangle has a length of 15.7 m and a width of 2.8 m. The area of the rectangle is

    15.7 2.8 43.96 m 2 .
    The cylinder has two circular surfaces. Use the formula for the area of a circle. Each circle has a

    diameter of 5 m. The radius is half the diameter. The radius is 5 2 2.5 m. Use 2.5 for r .

    A r 2
    A ( 2.5) 2 19.635 m 2
    The area of one circular surface is about 19.635 m 2 .

    To nd the surface area, add the areas of all the surfaces.
    S 43.96 2 19.635 83.23
    Rounding to the nearest square meter, the surface area of the cylinder is 83 m 2 .

    Question 74 ( page 180)
    C
    Correct. The surface area of a prism is the sum of the areas of its surfaces.

    To nd the area of the triangular surfaces, measure the length of the base of the triangle
    and its height. The length of the base is 3 cm, and the height is 2.6 cm.

    Use the formula for the area of a triangle.
    A 1 2 bh

    A 1 2 3 2.6
    A 3.9 cm 2
    The area of each triangular surface is 3.9 cm 2 .
    Find the area of the rectangular surfaces. Measure the length and width of one of the

    rectangles. The length is 4.4 cm, and the width is 3 cm. The area of each rectangular surface
    is 3 4.4, or 13.2 cm 2 .
    Find the sum of the areas of all the surfaces to nd the total surface area of the prism. The

    prism has 2 triangular surfaces and 3 rectangular surfaces.

    S 2 3.9 3 13.2 7.8 39.6 47.4 cm 2
    Choice C, 47 cm 2 , is closest to this value.

    Objective 8 238
    238 Page 239 240
    Mathematics Answer Key
    238
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    Question 75 ( page 181)
    C
    Correct. The volume of the gure is equal to the sum of the volumes of the cone and the cylinder.

    The base of a cone is a circle. Use the formula A
    r 2 to nd B , the area of the circular base. The radius of the circle measures 3.1 cm.

    B ( 3.1) 2
    The height, h , of the cone is the perpendicular distance from the top of the cone to its base. The

    height measures 7.6 cm. Substitute these values into the formula for the volume of a cone.

    V 1 3 Bh
    V
    1 3 ( 3.1) 2 ( 7.6)
    The height of the cylinder is 4 cm. Its base is a circle the same size as the cone s base. The

    cylinder s base also has an area of ( 3.1) 2 . Use the formula for the volume of a cylinder.

    V Bh
    V
    ( 3.1) 2 ( 4)

    The equation V 1 3 ( 3.1) 2 ( 7.6) ( 3.1) 2 ( 4)
    could be used to nd the volume of the gure to the nearest cubic centimeter.

    Question 76 ( page 181)
    B
    Correct. The passageway is a rectangular prism.

    Calculate the volume of the prism.
    V Bh ( lw ) h
    V
    ( 6 4) 3
    V 72 ft 3
    The part of the pipe that is inside the passageway is a cylinder that is 6 feet long, h 6 ft. The

    radius, r , of the cylinder is the diameter divided by 2.

    r 30 2 15 in.
    Convert the radius to feet; divide 15 by 12.
    r 15 12 1.25 feet
    Calculate the volume of the cylinder.
    V Bh r 2 h
    V
    ( 1.25) 2 6
    V 29.45 ft 3
    Subtract the volume of the pipe from the volume of the passageway to nd the volume of

    insulating material needed to ll the space around the pipe.

    72 29.45 42.55 43 ft 3
    To the nearest cubic foot, the volume of the space to be lled with insulating material is 43 cubic

    feet.

    Question 77 ( page 182)
    B
    Correct. On her walk to the scenic overlook, Jillian follows

    the sidewalk. She walks 300 475 775 ft. Compare this distance to the shortcut.

    Her journey along the sidewalk and her shortcut form a right triangle. The shortcut
    is the hypotenuse, c , of the right triangle.
    Use the Pythagorean Theorem to calculate the length of the shortcut.

    c 300 2 475 2 90,00 0 2 25,62 5
    315,6 25 561.81
    Subtract the length of the shortcut from the distance walked on the sidewalk to determine how

    much shorter the trip back to the parking lot is.
    775 561.81 213.19 ft
    To the nearest whole foot, the walk back to the parking lot is 213 feet shorter.

    Question 78 ( page 182)
    D
    Correct. The triangles are similar, so the lengths of the corresponding sides are proportional. Write

    a proportion. Compare the ratio of a known pair of corresponding sides to the ratio of the
    unknown side and its corresponding side. Let x represent the length of side SST .
    LN
    RT ST
    MN

    8 10 7 x
    Use cross products to solve for x .
    8 x 10 7 8 x 70

    x 8.75
    The length of side ST is 8.75 units.

    Question 79 ( page 182)
    The correct answer is 21. The rectangles are similar, so the lengths of the

    corresponding sides are proportional.
    Let w represent the missing width. 239
    239 Page 240 241
    Mathematics Answer Key
    239
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS w 18 24 28 24 w 18 28 24 w 504 w 21
    The larger poster board is 21 inches wide.

    Question 80 ( page 182)
    D
    Correct. If the dimensions of two similar gures
    are in the ratio a b , then their areas will be in the
    ratio ( a b ) 2 a b 2 2. The diameters of the two circles
    are in the ratio of 3 2 . The area of the two circles
    will then be in the ratio ( 3 2 ) 2 3 2 2 2 9 4 . The ratio of
    the area of the larger circle to that of the smaller
    circle is 9 4 .

    Question 81 ( page 183)
    A
    Correct. When you multiply the dimensions of a gure by a scale factor, the perimeter of the

    gure changes by the scale factor. In this case,
    the scale factor is 2 5 .
    To nd the perimeter of triangle PQR , multiply the
    perimeter of triangle MNO by the scale factor 2 5 .

    45 2 5 18 cm
    The perimeter of triangle PQR is 18 centimeters.

    Question 82 ( page 183)
    D
    Correct. When you multiply the dimensions of a solid

    gure by a scale factor, the volume of the gure

    changes by the cube of that scale factor. The scale factor is 3. The cube of the scale factor is 3 3 .
    3 3 27
    To nd the volume of the larger tank, multiply the volume of the smaller tank by 27.

    300 27 8100 gal
    The volume of the larger tank is 8100 gallons.

    Question 83 ( page 183)
    B
    Correct. If the dimensions of two similar solid gures

    are in the ratio a b , then their volumes will be
    in the ratio ( a b ) 3 a b 3 3 . The dimensions of the two
    figures are in the ratio 2 3 . The ratio of their
    volumes will be the cube of that ratio.

    ( 2 3 ) 3 2 3 3 3 8 27 To nd the volume of the smaller box, multiply
    the volume of the larger box by 8 27 .
    162 8 27 48 in. 3
    The volume of the smaller box is 48 cubic inches.

    Question 84 ( page 201)
    B
    Correct. Use a proportion to determine how many hours

    Rhonda actually spent on the project. Let n represent the number of hours Rhonda actually
    spent on the project. Write a proportion.
    n 12 80 100
    80 n = 12 100 80 n = 1200

    n = 15
    Rhonda actually spent 15 hours on the project.

    Question 85 ( page 201)
    B
    Correct. Use a proportion to solve this rate problem.

    Write two ratios, each of which compares the number of switches to the number of hours. Let x
    equal the number of hours required to manufacture 210 switches.

    Objective 9
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    1 2
    small height large height small width
    large width 240
    240 Page 241 242
    Mathematics Answer Key
    240
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    1 3 . 5 5 21 x 0
    35 x 1.5 210
    35 x 315
    x 9
    It will take the worker 9 hours to manufacture 210 switches.

    Question 86 ( page 201)
    A
    Correct. The events are dependent because the outcome of the rst draw affects the outcome of

    the second draw. Find the probability of the rst event. For the rst draw, 4 of the 25 possible
    outcomes are numbers less than ve: 1, 2, 3, and 4. The probability that the rst number drawn

    will be less than 5 is 2 4 5 .
    P ( 1st 5) 2 4 5
    Find the probability of the second event. One number was drawn, so now there are only 24

    numbers in the box. If the rst number drawn was a number less than 5, only 3 of the 24
    possible outcomes can be numbers less than 5. The probability that the second number drawn

    will be less than 5 is 2 3 4 .
    P ( 2nd 5) 2 3 4
    The probability that both numbers will be less than 5 is equal to the product of the two

    probabilities.
    P ( 1st 5 and 2nd 5) P ( 1st 5) P ( 2nd 5)

    2 4 5 2 3 4 6 1 0 2 0 5 1 0
    Question 87 ( page 201)
    C
    Correct. In 811 times at bat, Reggie got

    210 20 1 6 237 hits. The experimental probability that Reggie will get a hit during his next
    time at bat is the ratio of the number of times he got a hit ( 237) to the number of trials ( 811) .

    2 8 3 1 7 1 0.292
    The probability that Reggie will get a hit during his next time at bat is 0.292.

    Question 88 ( page 202)
    C
    Correct. Use the experimental probability to predict the

    number of seeds that will be 2 inches or more in height.

    There were a total of 9 16 26 24 75 plants in this experiment. Of these, 16 26 24
    66 plants reached a height of at least 2 inches after 3 months. The experimental probability
    that a plant will reach a height of at
    least 2 inches is 6 7 6 5 , or 2 2 2 5 .
    Let n represent the number of plants out of 600 that will reach a height of at least 2 inches.

    Write a proportion.
    6
    n
    00 2 2 2 5

    25 n 600 22
    25 n 13,200
    n 528
    Therefore, 528 plants out of 600 can be expected to reach a height of at least 2 inches in 3 months.

    Question 89 ( page 202)
    C
    Correct. The median is the middle value when the data elements are listed in order. Half the

    scores are above the median, and half the scores are below it. Therefore, Jean should use the
    median of the data.

    Question 90 ( page 203)
    D
    Correct. Trish spent a total of

    600 200 360 40 50 250 $ 1500.
    The plane fare should be 1 6 5 0 0 0 0 2 5 0.4, or
    40% of the graph. This is larger than 1 4 , or 25% , of
    the graph and less than 1 2 , or 50% , of the graph.
    The cost of food should be 1 2 5 0 0 0 0 1 2 5 0.13, or
    13% of the graph. Together, plane fare and food
    should be 40% 13% 53% , or slightly more
    than half the graph. Hotel costs should be

    1 3 5 6 0 0 0 2 6 5 0.24, or 24% of the graph. Hotel costs
    will be slightly less than 1 4 , or 25% , of the graph.

    Only choice D ts these requirements. 241
    241 Page 242 243
    Mathematics Answer Key
    241
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    Question 91 ( page 204)
    B
    Correct. The January bar is slightly above 1000, at approximately 1100. The February bar is less

    than halfway between 2000 and 3000, at approximately 2400. The March bar is slightly
    above 3000, at approximately 3100. The April bar is between 2000 and 3000, at approximately
    2600; it is higher than the February bar.

    Question 92 ( page 205)
    A
    Incorrect. The mean gives the average of a set of numbers, not the most frequently occurring data

    element.
    B Incorrect. The median gives the middle value of a set of numbers, not the most frequently occurring

    data element.
    C Correct. The mode tells which value occurs most frequently. In this case the mode is 7. The value

    7 occurs 5 out of the 8 times listed. It shows that Ava most frequently spends 7 hours studying
    during a week.
    D Incorrect. The range measures the spread between the highest and lowest values in the

    data, not the most frequently occurring data element.

    Question 93 ( page 205)
    A
    Incorrect. Sales increased at a constant rate of 5 CDs per

    week for the rst three weeks, but they then decreased during the fourth week.

    B Correct. Calculate the mean number of CDs sold per week.

    289.16 289
    C Incorrect. The length of the bar for Week 6 is three times the length of the bar for Week 1.

    However, read the numerical values of the bars from the graph. The value for the bar for Week 1
    is 280. The value of the bar for Week 6 is 300. Since 300 3 280, one bar is not three times
    as large as the other.
    D Incorrect. Calculate the total number of CDs sold.

    280 285 290 285 295 300 1735
    Since 1735 1800, the store did not sell more than 1800 CDs during the six-week period.

    Question 94 ( page 220)
    C
    Correct. Calculate the cost of the DVD player at Store A

    with the 10% discount.
    Use a proportion to nd 10% of 119.

    10 100 x 119

    100 x 1190
    x 11.9
    10% of $ 119 is $ 11.90.
    $ 119.00 $ 11.90 $ 107.10
    The cost of the DVD player at Store A with the 10% discount is $ 107.10.

    Calculate the cost of the DVD player at Store B with the 15% off coupon.
    Use a proportion to nd 15% of 138.
    15 100 x 138

    100 x 2070
    x 20.7
    15% of $ 138 is $ 20.70.
    $ 138.00 $ 20.70 $ 117.30
    The cost of the DVD player at Store B with the 15% discount is $ 117.30.

    This is more than the cost at Store A. Subtract to nd the difference.
    $ 117.30 $ 107.10 $ 10.20
    The DVD player costs $ 10.20 more at Store B than at Store A.

    Question 95 ( page 220)
    D
    Correct. One way to solve this problem is to nd the

    number of tiles needed to ll the large rectangle and then subtract the number of tiles that would
    have been needed for the small rectangle that will not be tiled.

    If the tiles are 3 inches on a side, there are 4 tiles per foot ( 3 4 12) .
    The width of the large rectangle is 2.5 feet. Multiply 4 tiles per foot by 2.5 feet to nd the
    number of tiles needed for the width.
    4 2.5 10

    Objective 10
    280 285 290 285 295 300 6 242
    242 Page 243 244
    Mathematics Answer Key
    242
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    The length of the large rectangle is 6 feet. Multiply 4 by 6 to nd the number of tiles
    needed for the length.
    4 6 24
    Multiply the number of tiles needed for the width by the number of tiles needed for the length to

    nd the number of tiles needed to ll the large rectangle.

    10 24 240
    In the same way, nd the number of tiles needed to ll the small rectangle.

    Number of tiles needed for the width: 4 1.5 6
    Number of tiles needed for the length: 4 2 8
    Number of tiles needed to ll the small rectangle: 6 8 48

    Subtract the tiles needed to ll the small rectangle from the tiles needed to ll the large
    rectangle to nd the total number of tiles needed.
    240 48 192 tiles
    Jessica will need 192 tiles. The tiles are sold in boxes of 100 tiles per box; she will need 2 boxes

    of tiles.

    Question 96 ( page 220)
    B
    Correct. The cost of producing 250 staplers can be found

    by evaluating the original function for n 250.
    c 1.12 n 300
    c 1.12 250 300
    c 280 300
    c 580
    If the xed costs increase by 15% , use a proportion to nd 15% of $ 300.

    15 100 x 300
    100 x 4500
    x 45
    If the xed costs increase from $ 300 to $ 300 $ 45 $ 345, the increased cost per day

    of producing n staplers is given by the formula c 1.12 n 345. The increased cost of producing
    250 staplers can be found by evaluating the new function for n 250.

    c 1.12 n 345
    c 1.12 250 345
    c 280 345
    c 625

    Find the percent by which the cost of producing 250 staplers increased.
    625 580 45
    What percent is 45 of 580? Write a proportion. x

    100 45 580
    580 x 4500

    x 7.76
    The cost of producing 250 staplers increased by about 8% .

    Question 97 ( page 220)
    C
    Correct. If Jesse and Philippe start at the same time and meet along the road, they both travel

    the same amount of time. Let t represent the time each travels. The rate they each travel
    multiplied by the time they each travel is equal to the distance they each travel ( d rt ) . The
    distance Jessie travels plus the distance Philippe travels equals 5 miles. Write an equation that
    shows the sum of the distances they travel equals 5 miles.

    4 t 6 t 5
    10 t 5
    t 0.5

    They will meet in 0.5 hour, or 30 minutes.

    Question 98 ( page 221)
    B
    Correct. Find the minimum reduction factor for the

    height. Multiply by 12 to convert the height of the original painting to inches.

    3 ft 1 ft 12in. 36 in.
    The height of the original painting is 36 inches. Find the scale factor by which it would have to

    be reduced if it is to t in a 9-inch-tall space.
    9 36 1 4

    The height of the reproduction would need to be
    reduced by a factor of 1 4 .
    Find the minimum reduction factor for the width. Multiply by 12 to convert the width of the

    original painting to inches.
    2 feet 1 ft 12in. 24 in.
    The width of the original painting is 24 inches. Find the scale factor by which it would have to

    be reduced if it is to t in an 8-inch-wide space. 243
    243 Page 244 245
    Mathematics Answer Key
    243
    MAT H E
    MAT I CS
    2 8 4 1 3
    The width of the reproduction would need to be
    reduced by a factor of 1 3 .
    One dimension must be reduced by a factor of 1 3
    to t in the allotted space, and the other dimension
    must be reduced by a factor of 1 4 . Since 1 4 is the
    smaller reduction factor, the picture must be
    reduced by a factor of 1 4 at minimum if both
    dimensions are to t on the page.

    Question 99 ( page 221)
    C
    Correct. The function h 12 0.1 m when rewritten as h 0.1 m 12 is in the form

    y mx b , so it is a linear function.
    To nd the height of the candle when it started burning at m 0, substitute 0 for m in the

    function.
    h 12 ( 0.1) ( 0)
    h 12 0
    h 12
    The candle was 12 inches tall when it started burning.

    To nd the height of the candle when m 120 minutes, substitute 120 for m in the function.
    h 12 ( 0.1) ( 120)
    h 12 12
    h 0
    The candle can burn for at most 120 minutes because in that amount of time its height will

    have been reduced to 0 inches.
    If the height of the candle were directly proportional to the number of minutes it burned,

    the function comparing them would be in the form y kx . The function h 12 0.1 m is not
    in this form.

    Question 100 ( page 221)
    A
    Correct. Let x represent the cost of the shirt. Then 2 x represents the cost of the pants. The sum of the

    costs of the three items, shirt pants shoes, equals the total cost, $ 100. Use the equation
    x 2 x 40 100. If like terms are simpli ed,
    this is the same equation as 3 x 40 100.

    B Incorrect. Let x represent the width of the rectangle. The length is 40 more than three times

    the width. The length is 3 x 40.

    To nd the perimeter, use the formula P 2( l w ) .
    100 2( 3 x 40 x )
    100 2( 4 x 40)
    100 8 x 80
    Use the equation 100 8 x 80 to solve this problem.

    C Incorrect. Let x represent the number of years. To solve this problem, use the simple interest
    formula I prt . The interest rate is 3% , or 0.03.
    Use the equation 40 100( 0.03) ( x ) , or 40 3 x , to solve this problem.

    D Incorrect. Let x represent the number of cups sold. If the student council earns $ 3 for each cup
    sold, 3 x represents the amount they earn for selling x cups. To nd the pro t, subtract the
    amount they spent on the cups. Use the equation 3 x 40 100 to solve this problem.

    Question 101 ( page 221)
    C
    Correct. One way to nd the values of x for which f ( x ) g ( x ) is to write the following inequality and

    simplify it.
    f ( x ) g ( x )

    2( x 3) 7 1 2 x 7

    2 x 6 7 1 2 x 7
    2 x 1 1 2 x 7

    Question 102 ( page 222)
    B
    Correct. The graphs show a pattern. All the graphs are parabolas, and all are congruent. The

    x -intercepts of the graphs equal the value by
    which x is decreased in the function.

    The function y ( x 1) 2 intersects the x -axis at the point x 1.

    The function y ( x 3) 2 intersects the x -axis at the point x 3.
    The function y ( x 5) 2 intersects the x -axis at the point x 5.
    Based on this pattern, the function y ( x 2) 2 should intersect the x -axis at the point x 2.

    Question 103 ( page 223)
    A
    Correct. Look for the pattern. The dimensions of the

    cylinders are increasing by a scale factor of 1.5. 3
    2 4 3 . 5 6 4 . . 7 5 5 1.5 244
    244 Page 245 246
    Mathematics Answer Key
    244
    MAT
    H
    E
    MAT

    I
    CS

    6 4 9 6 13 9 . 5 1.5
    To nd the volume of the previous cylinder in this series, you could increase its dimensions by
    the same scale factor, 1. 5.

    Question 104 ( page 223)
    B
    Correct. Represent the number of visitors the site had each week in terms of x .

    First Week: x
    Second Week: 2 x ( twice as many as the rst week)

    Third Week: 2 x 22 ( 22 more than the second week)
    Fourth Week: 2.5 x ( 2.5 times as many as the rst week)
    The mean of the number of visitors is equal to the sum of the number of visitors divided by the
    number of weeks for which records were kept, 4.
    Represent their sum.
    1st wk 2nd wk 3rd wk 4th wk
    x 2 x ( 2 x 22) 2.5 x
    Represent their mean. x
    2 x ( 2 x 22) 2.5 x 4 245

This guide last edited 12/08/2004
This guide last revised 12/08/2004
This guide created 12/08/2004